Home

Sprint User's Manual.book

1. uuo Yaw ejoju J eqqe I JC 9UJEJ J l eJoul l 410d T eo LO 6 moy l4 I nox l Iqe2 ya i meme z l N 5 n H cee f g l I I E l Lva sa z I EE I 91x 6 l E l z uuog a l I ha I E vied aw I aos i pes k I rS 3 S 1eqq 5 ajed D cQ Pt ex z d DA eig Po rine IW o a I I ow o a I ps iz 8i elJ ed g FEA YE I n a juud I oza rj E l 339 u I y y I S204 Wed l PA DXL Oa l l ado a payeuuon x v2 9 E JOJ pui paa pus 10j28i E ON l ton I e Is d E Beso Beg wore P poma payseu l T ux al z a L i jeuondo si je DT X E lm SERA Id 97 Iuo9 JON T l ooa E m I er rem E YN eq Baar osez T oz psa I era WR l E ix d l pian T Apes e I ez q oad I WM Yr p I pa 0L EY l om EEL lelug Jeu l SP l n 5 I su HA mg kb 8 b B sz MINSE voi v Luz T 5 f pi I epu Pu I ged I a d a Hd I zx AGH VEPOATOSS a US JOU az x io a I a a m EI s2 E wa d l oars D PIelus zeuu m pup xy 1 94 I E l voL 7 es er od 5 c Z WAS prety Rim aS 1 M 3 rem NN
2. 4 x M4 6 deep i f 1 Sf o E N Q9 e I O i g2 297 4 x M4 6 deep tol amp BASLER z Photosensitive surface eo s SS of the CMOS sensor B S gg sppfnt Z e S 1O xt 7 i p 10 1 z 4 x M3 setscrews a 49 n t for locking a lens 453 mount 9100 0 ai ro 87 55 A A o gt reference plane e 4 1 E z 5 t Q E E es 8 8 Tolerances are typical 3 Drawings are not to scale k P e Fig 8 Mechanical Dimensions in mm 8k Cameras Basler sprint Mono Cameras 17 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 1 5 6 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for 8k Cameras The sensor positioning accuracy is as shown in the drawings below Camera Link medium full X 3o Camera Link base e ps reference plane Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale Fig 9 Sensor Positioning Accuracy in mm unless otherwise noted 8k Cameras 18 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 7 Sensor Line L
3. ITI q a a gt 32 6 44 0 55 15 min 40 8 max 66 5 m 114 Drawing not to scale Fig 2 Using the M58 x 0 75 V Basler Lens Mount Distances in mm Basler sprint Mono Cameras 9 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 Adjusting the Assembly of Optical Components For a magnification of 1 0 3 the Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens requires a distance of 114 mm between its flange and the CMOS sensor The distance to the CMOS sensor is accounted for by adding the following partial distances 15 mm distance between the CMOS sensor and the flange of the camera s V Basler mount 55 mm extension of the M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount 44 mm extension of the UNIFOC 76 helical mount The M39 x 26 tpi adapter fits completely inside the UNIFOC 76 helical mount 1 Focus the lens on an object placed in front of the lens at the working distance of ca 362 mm Use the helical mount for focussing 10 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 4 Spectral Response The following graph shows the spectral response for monochrome cameras Note The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics and light source characteristics 70 60 50 40 30 20 Quantum Efficiency 96 10 400 500 60
4. Line B Eine AW00016213000 Object Passing Camera N Point 4 4 amp 4 Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 15 Dual Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 1 46 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 2 Stored pixel data for point 2 from line B is transmitted from the camera Drawing not to scale Stored pixel data for point 2 from line B ct Line B anes Object Passing Camera Nc Point 4 lt a Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 16 Dual Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 2 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 47 Line Acquisition Modes AW00016213000 ExSync Cycle 3 Pixel data for point 3 from line A is transmitted from the camera p Pixel data for Drawing not to scale point 4 from line B is stored in a buffer II Image of point 3 acquired by line A 4 B
5. ssssse 27 pin numbering sesser 29 op 30 control and status registers 167 174 D data valid bit ssssssssssss 36 delay exposure start ssssse 73 line valid delay 97 106 116 low line rate compensation 73 design calculations 65 design recommendations system 63 dimensions 2k and 4k cameras 13 2k and 8k cameras 12 8k cameras sss 16 17 DSNU shading correction 129 dual line acquisition modes 43 GUST iieri eder le er Heredes 22 E edge controlled exposure time control mode seeeseseeees 74 edge controlled exposure time control mode sessssssssss 69 eight tap video data output modes 109 enhanced shading correction BSG p RN 128 environmental requirements 20 233 Index ESC enhanced shading correction 128 exposure averaging sess 125 control mode control and status register sssssssee 188 effect on line rate 125 exposure start delay sss 73 exposure time control and status register 179 mode control and status register 178 exposure
6. 206 Basler sprint Mono Cameras Index recommendations operating ncc n nere 63 system design sesssse 63 registers oae 167 reset aa aiaa ANAA pus 158 return material authorization 215 RMA number ssssseeeeeee 215 RS 644 serial communication 39 S sample code eese 214 saving camera parameter sets 159 sensor Cleanitig eai nce d 23 line location 2k 4k cameras 15 line location 8k cameras 19 positioning accuracy 2k and 4k cameras 14 positioning accuracy 8k cameras esssuuse 18 SIZG bier hens entices 2 3 4 5 serial communication 39 control and status register 197 serial number inquiry register 169 serial to camera input signal 35 serial to frame grabber output signal 38 shading correction 129 enhanced eesese 128 Standard 9 2 ace eio inventi 128 shading mode control and status register ceee 188 shading value generate control and status register sessss 189 s control and status register 205 single line max 70 kHz acquisition mode esssss 42 specifications eeeeeseeeeeeese 2 spectr
7. Image of poin acquired by line B UU DU LLL Line A Line B Object Passing Camera Point 4 lt a Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 17 Dual Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 3 48 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 4 Stored pixel data for point 4 from line B is transmitted from the camera Drawing not to scale Stored pixel data for point 4 from line B Line B nine A Object Passing Camera N poan Point 4 4 Movement Point 3 Point 2 Point 1 Fig 18 Dual Line Acquisition ExSync Cycle 4 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 49 Line Acquisition Modes AWO00016213000 Setting the Camera for a Dual Line Max 140 kHz Acquisition Mode You can set the camera for two line acquisition mode by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own applicat
8. Start Delay ExSync Programmable 1 21 us 20 ns ExSync Level Controlled ExSync Edge Controlled 2 51 us 20 ns Table 9 Exposure Start Delay Delay Due to Low Line Rate Compensation When low line rate compensation operates see Section 4 1 3 on page 72 a delay of 14 2 us precedes each line acquisition in addition to exposure start delay Basler sprint Mono Cameras 73 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 4 2 Free Run 4 2 1 Basics of Free Run Controlled Operation In free run an ExSync signal is not required The camera generates its own internal control signal based on two programmable parameters Line Period and Exposure Time The camera s internally generated control signal rises and falls in a fashion similar to an ExSync signal In free run the camera exposes and outputs lines continuously and the line period parameter setting determines the camera s line rate 1 Line Rate Line Period In free run two modes of operation are available edge controlled and programmable In free run edge controlled mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the internal control signal The pixels are exposed and charge is accumulated over the full line period from rising edge to rising edge of the internal control signal The falling edge of the control signal is irrelevant The pixel values are read out of the sensor on the rising edge of the internal control signal as sh
9. llle 2 1 2 2 Camera Models with 4k Pixels llle 3 1 23 Camera Model with 8k Pixels llle 5 1 3 Lens Adapters eee bite cR eme eee Reese le k tu a n Ret 6 1 3 4 Lens Adapters for 2k and 4k Cameras 00 0c eee eee 6 1 3 2 Lens Adapters for the 8k Camera 000 ccc eee tee 6 1 3 2 1 Adapting with the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler Helical Mount 7 1 3 2 2 Adapting with the M58 x 0 75 V Basler Lens Mount 9 1 4 Spectral Response 0 ce er 11 1 5 Mechanical Specifications llle 12 1 5 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points for 2k and 4k Cameras 12 1 5 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for 2k and 4k Cameras sss 14 1 5 3 Sensor Line Location for 2k and 4k Cameras llslseslsessss 15 1 5 4 F mount Adapter Dimensions 2k and 4k Cameras 2 16 1 5 5 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points for 8k Cameras 16 1 5 6 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for 8k Cameras 00 00 e eee eee 18 1 5 7 Sensor Line Location for 8k Cameras 0 0 00 cece ee 19 1 6 Environmental Requirements 0 00 0 20 1 6 1 Temperature and Humidity llli 20 1 6 2 Heat Dissipation eR hee eee ele ERR m ee s 20 Tae CPIBEQUIONS 24 pedes T a Sot Be Eid E M aie he See ied pL OM AME 21 2 Physical Intertace sissies tere eda uy hey y Ra Rev s Reet awa Pes 25 2 1 General Description of the Connections
10. 86 medium full Camera Link configuration eeren 26 33 model info inquiry register 168 mounting holes 2k and 4k cameras 12 BK cameras ssssssseeeee 16 O OffSet oso imet eed 120 offset control and status register 184 operating recommendations 63 output signals Camera Link clock 37 data valid bit ssessssssse 36 EXSynG TEE E eR 69 line valid bit essessessssss 36 pixel data bits eeen 36 serial to frame garbber 38 overtemperature sseseess 156 over triggering eeennee 71 overvoltage protection 155 P parameter sets saving 159 pin assignments secere 27 pin numbering esseere 29 pixel data bits eesessesessss 36 pixel data sequence see video data sequence 93 pixel Size uiii ener 2 3 4 5 DpOWBE dre eee dde 32 power cable seeeeeeeeeeese 31 precautions ed enirn een d 21 PRNU shading correction 129 product ID inquiry register 169 programmable exposure time control mode 75 programmable exposure time control mode sssesssseeeeeee 70 R raw values ssssssseene 174 read write commands
11. Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 4 Tap 12 Bit 4 Tap 10 Bit 4 Tap 8 Bit Port DO TxINO RxOutO D3 Bit 0 D3 Bit 0 D3 Bit 0 Port D1 TxIN1 RxOut1 D3 Bit 1 D3 Bit 1 D3 Bit 1 Port D2 TxIN2 RxOut2 D3 Bit 2 D3 Bit 2 D3 Bit 2 Port D3 TxIN3 RxOut3 D3 Bit 3 D3 Bit 3 D3 Bit 3 Port D4 TxIN4 RxOut4 D3 Bit 4 D3 Bit 4 D3 Bit 4 Port D5 TxIN6 RxOut6 D3 Bit 5 D3 Bit 5 D3 Bit 5 Port D6 TxIN27 RxOut27 D3 Bit 6 D3 Bit 6 D3 Bit 6 Port D7 TxIN5 RxOut5 D3 Bit 7 D3 Bit 7 D3 Bit 7 MSB Port EO TxIN7 RxOut7 D2 Bit 0 D2 Bit 0 Not used Port E1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D2 Bit 1 D2 Bit 1 Not used Port E2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D2 Bit 2 D2 Bit 2 Not used Port E3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D2 Bit 3 D2 Bit 3 Not used Port E4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D2 Bit 4 D2 Bit 4 Not used Port E5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D2 Bit 5 D2 Bit 5 Not used Port E6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D2 Bit 6 D2 Bit 6 Not used Port E7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D2 Bit 7 D2 Bit 7 Not used Port FO TxIN15 RxOut15 D2 Bit 8 D2 Bit 8 Not used Port F1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D2 Bit 9 D2 Bit 9 MSB Not used Port F2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D2 Bit 10 Not used Not used Port F3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D2 Bit 11 MSB Not used Not used Port F4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D3 Bit 8 D3 Bit 8 Not used Port F5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D3 Bit 9 D3 Bit 9 MSB Not used Port F6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D3 Bit 10 Not used Not used Port F7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D3 Bit 11 MSB Not used Not used LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid Line Valid Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used Not Used Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Data Valid Data Valid Spare TxIN23
12. reference plane Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale Fig 6 Sensor Line Location 2k and 4k Cameras Basler sprint Mono Cameras 15 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 1 5 4 F mount Adapter Dimensions 2k and 4k Cameras 31 5 H ly J Tle i i tle FRAN Photosensitive surface 46 5 Em of the CMOS sensor Drawing is not to scale Fig 7 Camera with F mount Adapter Attached in mm 2k and 4k Cameras 1 5 5 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points for 8k Cameras The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides guarantee precise mounting with high repeatability The camera s dimensions in millimeters are as shown in Figure 4 on page 13 Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the front and two mounting holes on the sides as shown in the drawings 16 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions
13. Gain and Offset Programmable via a serial link Requirements Connectors One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature receptacle One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature One 26 pin female MDR connector receptacle Two 26 pin female MDR connectors Power 12 VDC 10 Max 5 0 W 12 VDC when set for the single line acquisition mode Max 6 0 W 12 VDC when set for all other line acquisition modes Lens Adapter F mount M42 C Mount see Section 1 3 on page 6 Housing Size 48 0 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm without lens adapter or connectors Lx W x H 84 9 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm with F mount adapter and connectors Weight 960 g without lens adapter Table 1 General Specifications for 2k Cameras For information about the combinations of parameter settings for achieving the maximum specified line rates see Table 10 on page 87 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 2 2 Camera Models with 4k Pixels Specification spL4096 39km spL4096 70km Sensor Size 2 lines 4096 pixels per line Sensor Type Monochrome linear CMOS Pixel Size 10 um x 10 um Camera Link 40 MHz or 80 MHz switchable Clock Speed Maximum 38 6 kHz 70 kHz Line Rate Data Output Type Camera Link base and medium full configuration Data Output Modes 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 4 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 4 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 8tap
14. The value of the BFS byte is always 0x01 FTF Frame Type and Format field Identifies the frame type and format 1 Frame Address DATA BCC BFE Length specified in FTF Length specified in DataLen 8 bits 8 bits Size 1 byte The bits in the FTF field are assigned as follows 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OpCode BCC AddrLen Code ACK NAK 8 bits The MSB of the FTF field is on the left highest bit of the opcode and the LSB of the field is on the right lowest bit of the address length Basler sprint Mono Cameras 207 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 208 The value in the OpCode portion of the FTF field defines the function of the binary command that is whether it is a read command or a write command The following OpCodes are available OpCode Function 0b00000 This is a write command used to write a single setting to the camera 0b00001 This is a read command used to read a single setting from the camera 0b00010 This is a read response frame without an address field The AddrLen bits are don t care 0b00100 This is a bulk write command used to upload a file into the camera 0500101 This is a bulk read command used to download a file from the camera 0500110 This is a bulk read response frame without an address field The AddrLen bits are don t care The BCC Code portion of the FTF field indicates the presence of a Block
15. dll where is specific to the frame grabber vendor There are four functions exported by that DLL clSeriallnit Initialize the serial communication for a specific board clSerialRead Read bytes from the camera clSerialWrite Write bytes to the camera clSerialClose Close the serial communication To execute the binary programming commands you can call up the functions exported by the DLL Note When the camera is powered on or when a camera reset is performed your PC may receive one random character on the serial interface We recommend clearing the serial input buffers in your PC after a camera power on or reset 206 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 7 3 1 Configuring the Camera The Binary Read Write Command Protocol With the binary read write command protocol data is placed into a frame and sent to the camera When the frame is received it is checked for validity If valid the data is extracted from the frame and the command is executed This section describes the basic layout of a binary command frame Figure 52 shows a graphical representation of the fields within a binary command frame The text below the graphic describes each field of the command frame in detail Transmit Response Fig 52 Representation of a Command Frame and Response BFS FTF DataLen 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits BFS Binary Frame Start field Identifies the start of a binary frame Size 1 byte
16. 058 E s cnm A dios E ni W I IT m inns I E MI 8 T ioi u k duog l gg I us mil g B E i m d T KL Wd 5 PE TUIN I id OK l 9r UA six M l TE ed us 93e zvori06sd odii bey 9i vi vod I iz s aT OX oz jx ose I I 3019 l l i 30k I a A eo LL a I x s I ve 9495 AJN EN p ae aa Hs vd l I ou uL VZOR 10680 K 5 9ed o voe l J900u VB8ZY zu Fd 3 ot ta uod sa d oz Odes I 206Sa l FIE VP z3 vod Em veiled oz 298 Vah ed z r 13 0A 106 I I m 4 xL Wod I I 8r TTE isa E M M z ppm Dos m a 7 104 lini XL E N S I is nero l l uA xL E ie SSPN Bed EM pes l ma H neg uem G ENEN P7 aL za d I 7 veed uvis l pom E 2 oui me 9r l AC Lou id d I 299 zz E wvOnTOESA o z wn spa i m lennuisuea 28 od uod l panase i m z 9 I Im 2 206 3 m L W sa 905 Da 95 I o eZ I 01 dled m e z 6384 Iz ou gx l p ES s l 30 l i E 3 I J z I Si v l gr or 2 paid zl The PZ uyn l PSAISS9 S Id z TWAT som z d ox ed l 3j Sz 55 a aeuo NI l E z I qos 90 h Jed Iez p PAN pss 2 62x l s EE M Pesn boxe EZ sz EZ R 7690 Eze E yw 008 ES l sz xL Ep ee l l a J ION 8 9 EE Pa m ara Lf Ben mit l biod g ETT I Y00 PEN i Z m sre Pene I eng noxio D d posi sva E orx i N xi Iox Ww NaSO aS T F H uod ie N be l v oxy Eil Pa d TE l ER oL 12x vod TION 24 z ve I Mn I seed X en word j 2ed d X Ie 00 EN 3E z oo ze l aon Si G TT l al d d l P Z
17. Byte 3 High byte of the raw value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Basler sprint Mono Cameras 181 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x0011 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw line period setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related fields are set The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 Mid byte of the min value Byte 3 High byte of the min value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0015 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw line period setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related fields are set The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 Mid byte of the max value Byte 3 High byte of the max value Byte 4 Always 0x00 not used 182 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Gain CSR Note The gain can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Gain field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 174 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x0E00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The in
18. Edge Controlled Exposure 12 64 us 12 75 us 14 86 us 14 98 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 64 us 12 75 us 14 86 us 14 98 us Table 25 Line Valid Delay with the 4k Camera Set for a 8 Tap Video Data Output Mode Basler sprint Mono Cameras 117 Video Data Output Modes 8k Camera AW00016213000 Line Valid Delays for 8 Tap Modes 8k Camera Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 68 us 9 81 us 13 58 us 13 71 us Edge Controlled Exposure 10 03 us 10 16 us 13 93 us 14 06 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 68 us 9 81 us 13 58 us 13 71 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 73 us 9 86 us 13 63 us 13 76 us Edge Controlled Exposure 10 08 us 10 21 us 13 98 us 14 11 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 73 us 9 86 us 13 63 us 13 76 us Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 12 71 us 12 81 us 15 01 us 15 11 us Edge Controlled Exposure 13 06 us 13 16 us 15 36 us 15 46 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 71 us 12 81 us 15 01 us 15 11 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 80 MHz
19. In Figure 20 through Figure 23 the image of the object is passing line A first and line A will be delayed Basler sprint Mono Cameras 53 Line Acquisition Modes AW00016213000 Acquisition 1 LII co p Image of point 1 acquired by line A l ir Line A pixel err v data from this not useful acquisition is in this case stored in a buf fer Line A Line B Object Passing Camera Movement N Nec Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Fig 20 Time Delayed Line Summing Acquisition One 54 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Acquisition 2 Pixel data is summed and transmitted from the camera as if it were a single line udi EA H p Stored data from line A Image of point for point 1 2 acquired by line A Line A p
20. latest version of the tool go to the Basler web site at www baslerweb com Once you have downloaded the latest version of the tool uninstall the old version from your computer and install the new version No Start the CCT click on the port selection drop down menu and select an RS 644 port from the list Does a list of camera parameters appear Does a This type of camera is not Yes supported message appear The port is present and can be accessed but the camera is not Yes No responding Make sure that The camera has power and that the power source meets the requirements in Section 2 5 on page 32 You are using the correct data cables between you camera The RS 644 and the frame grabber see Section 2 4 on page 31 No port is working ane i correctly Exit The wires in the data cable are continuous this chart The cable connections are firmly seated After you made these checks is the problem still present Yes Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the front pages of this manual Basler sprint Mono Cameras 223 Troubleshooting and Support AW00016213000 8 4 5 Before Calling Basler Technical Support To help you as quickly and efficiently as possible when you have a problem with a Basler camera it is important that you collect several pieces of information before you contact Basler technical support Copy the form that appears on this and the next page or download it f
21. the camera uses the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X and Y to transmit pixel data a line valid bit a data valid bit and the Camera Link pixel clock The assignment of the bits to the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X and Y is as shown in Table 16 on page 102 and Table 17 on page 103 respectively The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data As shown in Figure 36 on page 104 and Figure 37 on page 105 the camera samples and transmits data on each rising edge of the Camera Link clock The Camera Link pixel clock frequency is as stated in Section 2 8 4 on page 37 The line valid bit indicates that a valid line is being transmitted The data valid bit indicates that valid pixel data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when the line valid and data valid bits are both high 4 Tap 10 Bit Output Mode Operation in 4 tap 10 bit mode is similar to 4 tap 12 bit mode In 10 bit mode however the two least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 10 most significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted 4 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode Operation in 4 tap 8 bit mode is similar to 4 tap 12 bit mode In 8 bit mode however the four least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 8 most significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted Note The video data output mode that you select may affect the camera s maximum allowed line rat
22. 1 on page 207 An unknown error with the binary read write command format has occurred Repeated pattern of 3 The last shading table generation process failed The flashing will 8 slow orange flashes stop when you successfully complete a generation process or you reset the camera Repeated pattern of 2 One of the following errors is present 9 slow orange flashes The maximum allowed line rate has been exceeded see Section lowest Section 4 3 on page 77 ExSync has not changed state for 5 seconds or longer Check the cable and the ExSync generating device Table 30 Camera Status Indicators Basler sprint Mono Cameras 217 Troubleshooting and Support AW00016213000 8 4 Troubleshooting Charts The following pages contain several troubleshooting charts that can help you find the cause of problems users sometimes encounter The charts assume that you are familiar with the camera s features and settings and with the settings for your frame grabber If you are not we suggest you review the manuals for your camera and frame grabber before you troubleshoot a problem 218 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Troubleshooting and Support 8 4 4 No Image Use this chart if you see no image at all when you attempt to capture an image with your frame grabber in this situation you will usually get a message from the frame grabber such as time out If you see a poor quality image a completely black image or a completely white image use the
23. 6 X3 Output Camera Link Data from the Camera Link transmitter 19 X3 LVDS 5 XCIk Output Camera Link Transmit clock from the Camera Link transmitter 18 XCIk a 7 SerTC Input RS 644 Serial communication data receive 20 SerTC LVDS SerTC serial to camera 8 SerTFG Output RS 644 Serial communication data transmit 21 SerTFG LVDS SerTFG serial to frame grabber 9 CC1 Input RS 644 ExSync external trigger 22 CC1 LVDS 10 CC2 Input RS 644 Not used 23 CC2 SENS 11 CC3 Input RS 644 Not used 24 CC3 n 12 CC4 Input RS 644 Not used 25 CCA E Table 6 Pin Assignments for MDR Connector 1 Pins 1 13 14 and 26 are all tied to ground inside of the camera Basler sprint Mono Cameras 27 Physical Interface AW00016213000 Pin Number Signal Name Direction Level Function 1 13 14 261 Gnd Input Ground Ground for the inner shield of the cable 2 YO Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 15 YO Link LVDS 3 Y1 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 16 V14 Link LVDS 4 Y2 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 17 Y24 Link LVDS 6 Y3 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 19 Y34 Link LVDS 5 YCIk Output Camera Transmit clock from the Camera Link transmitter 18 YClk4 Link LVDS 8 Z0 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 21 20 Link LVDS 9 Z1 Output
24. 8 bit Synchronization Via external trigger signal or free run Exposure Control Edge controlled level controlled or programmable Gain and Offset Programmable via a serial link Requirements Connectors One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature receptacle Two 26 pin female MDR connectors Power 12 VDC 10 Max 7 0 W 12 VDC when set for the single line acquisition mode Max 10 0 W 12 VDC when set for all other line acquisition modes Lens Adapter F mount M42 Housing Size 48 0 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm without lens adapter or connectors Lx W x H 84 9 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm with F mount adapter and connectors Weight 960 g without lens adapter Table 2 General Specifications for 4k Cameras Basler sprint Mono Cameras Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 Specification spL4096 140km Sensor Size 2 lines 4096 pixels per line Sensor Type Monochrome linear CMOS Pixel Size 10 um x 10 um Camera Link 40 MHz or 80 MHz switchable Clock Speed Maximum 140 kHz in dual line acquisition mode Line Rate Data Output Type Camera Link base and medium full configuration Data Output Modes 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 4 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 8tap 8 bit Synchronization Via external trigger signal or free run Exposure Control Edge controlled level controlled or programmable Gain and Offset Programmable
25. Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 22 Z4 Link LVDS 10 Z2 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 23 72 Link LVDS 12 Z3 Output Camera Data from the Camera Link transmitter 25 734 Link LVDS 11 ZCIk Output Camera Transmit clock from the Camera Link transmitter 24 ZClka Link LVDS Table 7 Pin Assignments for MDR Connector 2 Pins 1 13 14 and 26 are all tied to Ground inside of the camera 28 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Physical Interface 2 2 2 Pin Assignments for the 6 pin Micro miniature Receptacle The pin assignments for the 6 pin micro miniature receptacle are as shown in Table 8 Pin Number Signal Name Direction Level Function 1 21 12 VDC Input 12 VDC 10 Camera power 3 4 sis Not used 5 6 DC Gnd Input Ground DC ground Table 8 Pin Assignments for the 6 Pin Receptacle Pins 1 and 2 are tied together inside of the camera Pins 5 and 6 are tied together inside of the camera 2 2 3 Pin Numbering Figure 12 shows the pin numbering for the connectors on the back of the camera for 2k and 4k cameras The pin numberings for 8k cameras are analogous isp 13 1 9 26 14 E J ke Not present on all models see Table 5 and Figure 11 on page 26 Fig 12 Pin Numbering 2k and 4k cameras 8k cameras
26. Cameras Line Valid Delays for 8 Tap Modes 2k Cameras Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 58 us 9 71 us 13 35 us 13 48 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 93 us 10 06 us 13 70 us 13 83 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 58 us 9 71 us 13 35 us 13 48 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 56 us 9 71 us 13 31 us 13 46 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 56 us 9 71 us 13 31 us 13 46 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 56 us 9 71 us 13 31 us 13 46 us Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 12 60 us 12 70 us 14 77 us 14 88 us Edge Controlled Exposure 12 95 us 13 05 us 15 12 us 15 23 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 60 us 12 70 us 14 77 us 14 88 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 12 58 us 12 70 us 14 76 us 14 88 us Edge Controlled Exposure 12 58 us 12 70 us 14 76 us 14 88 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 58 us 12 70 us 14 76 us 14 88 us Table 24 Line Valid
27. Exposure Time CSR see page 179 76 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 3 Maximum Allowed Line Rate Minimum Line Period If the enhanced raw line acquisition mode is selected in ExSync operation the Valid for the spL2048 70kc and for the spL4096 70kc only maximum line rate for these camera models is 137 kHz The information in this section is intended to give you a comprehensive understanding about the factors that influence the maximum allowed line rate and how those factors interact In general the maximum allowed line acquisition rate can be limited by four factors The exposure time for the acquired lines If you use long exposure times you can acquire fewer lines per second The amount of time it takes to read an acquired line out of the imaging sensor and into the camera s line buffer This time can vary depending on the length of the area of interest AOI for the acquired lines Smaller AOls can take less time to read out The amount of time that it takes to process the pixels before they are ready for transmission This time varies by camera model The amount of time it takes to transmit the pixel data for an acquired line from the camera to the host PC This time can vary depending on the length of the area of interest AOI for the acquired lines Smaller AOls take less time to transmit For information about the camera settings to obtain the maxi
28. Fixed Gradient 0 00 cee eee 143 6 6 2 Test Image Two Moving Gradient 00 e eee ee 144 6 6 3 Test Image Three Uniform Black 000000 eee eee 145 6 6 4 Test Image Four Uniform Gray 0 0 eee ee 145 6 7 Bie Stamp Siete Seng nnde es PRS ee eth FRE RR Ae eed 146 6 7 4 Enabling and Setting the Line Stamp 150 68 LookupTable isser ennea Re gue eee eh Vode end bene ee eee ey 151 6 9 Imaging Sensor Temperature 154 6 10 Camera Power Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection 0 155 6 11 Error Condition Detection llle 156 6 11 1 Imaging Sensor Overtemperature Condition Detected 156 6 11 2 Camera Power Undervoltage or Overvoltage Condition Detected 157 Basler sprint Mono Cameras iii Table of Contents AW00016213000 6 12 Camera Status ChecksS 0 0c tee eee 158 613 Gamera Reset tain Pasties Vannes RR CREUSE tia Eie ken Ute teats 158 6 14 Configuration Sets 0 tented 159 6 14 1 Saving the Work Set to a User Set File llle 161 6 14 2 Activating a User Set File or the Factory Set File 162 6 14 3 Which Configuration Set File will Load at Startup or at Reset 163 6 14 4 Downloading Configuration Set Files to Your PC 163 6 14 5 Uploading Configuration Set Files to Your Camera 004 164 Configuring the Cameras dd vx vr xw x prar xw xx d wea 165 7
29. If you do this the pixel values used to calculate the PRNU correction values will be corrected for DSNU For this option to work correctly you must have already generated DSNU values before you generate the PRNU values For optimum correction results we strongly recommend to generate both DSNU and PRNU shading correction values 7 Signal the camera to generate a set of PRNU values a You can start the generation of a set of PRNU values with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus see Section 7 1 on page 166 With the CCT set the value of the Generate parameter in the DSNU amp PRNU Shading Correction parameters group to Generate PRNU Values or to Generate PRNU Values with DSNU b You can also start the generation of a set of PRNU values by using a binary write command see Section 7 3 on page 206 to write a value to the Generate field of the Shading Value Generate CSR see page 189 8 The camera must make at least 128 acquisitions to generate a set of PRNU values If your camera is set to control exposure with an ExSync signal you must generate at least 128 ExSync signal cycles after you signal the camera to begin generating the values If you are running the camera in a free run exposure time control mode you must wait long enough for the camera to complete at least 128 acquisitions a When the camera is capturing the lines it needs to create the PRNU shading values the line valid and data valid signals will go high and low as y
30. Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0500 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Camera Version Offset 0x0001 Size 3 Bytes Type Read only Description The value in this field indicates the camera s version information The bytes in the field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the camera version BCD coded Byte 2 High byte of the camera version BCD coded Byte 3 Register layout ID BCD coded Basler sprint Mono Cameras 169 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Firmware Version Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0510 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Firmware Version Offset 0x0001 Size 128 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera s firmware version The string is zero terminated if less than 128 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 128 bytes are needed Camera Status Inquiry The camera has been programmed to detect several error conditions When an error condition is detected a flag is set The camera status inquiry register
31. Interface 2 7 Input Signals The camera s input signals include a SerTC signal and an ExSync signal as described below 2 7 1 Serial to Camera The Serial To Camera SerTC input signal is an RS 644 LVDS signal as specified in the Camera Link standard The signal is input to the camera on pins 7 and 20 of MDR connector one as specified in the standard and as shown in Table 6 on page 27 and in Figure 13 on page 34 Signals applied to the SerTC input are used to configure the camera For more detailed information about the serial connection see Section 2 9 on page 39 and Section 7 3 on page 206 2 7 2 External Sync ExSync An external sync ExSync signal can be input into the camera and can be used to control line acquisition and exposure time The ExSync signal is an RS 644 LVDS signal as specified in the Camera Link standard and is usually supplied to the camera by your frame grabber The signal is input to the camera on pins 9 and 22 of MDR connector one as shown in Table 6 on page 27 and in Figure 13 on page 34 When the camera is operating under the control of an ExSync signal three exposure time control modes are available edge controlled level controlled and programmable For more detailed information about exposure control modes see Section 4 1 on page 69 When the camera is operating under the control of an ExSync signal the period of the ExSync signal determines the camera s line rate 1 Line Rate ExSync Signal
32. MHz Single spL4096 140km 8 taps 80 MHz Dual spL8192 70km 8 taps 80 MHz Single Table 10 Combinations of Taps and Camera Link Clock Speed Settings for the Maximum Specified Line Rate Basler sprint Mono Cameras 87 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 88 AW00016213000 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes 5 Video Data Output Modes This section describes the video data output modes available on the camera The video data output mode will determine the format of the pixel data output from the camera and will affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate 5 1 Overview The camera can operate in different video data output modes The video data output mode will determine the format of the pixel data output from the camera The video data output modes available vary on each camera model as shown in Table 11 on page 90 The main difference between the video data output modes is the amount of pixel data that will be output on each cycle of the Camera Link pixel clock In the 2 tap modes data for 2 pixels will be output on each cycle In the four tap modes data for four pixels will be output on each pixel clock cycle And in 8 tap mode data for 8 pixels will be output on each pixel clock cycle The selection of a video data output mode also determines the bit depth of the transmitted pixel data The video data output modes are described in detail in Section 5 2 1 on page 92 through Sec
33. RxOut23 Not Used Not Used Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Table 17 Bit Assignments for 4 Tap Output Modes MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Basler sprint Mono Cameras 103 Video Data Output Modes AW00016213000 Ro he OR pea a a ens San ae AOR ar eo a 4 aso owl We My nee A ete ot ExSynG J a AANA NAAN AA NN AOS BN a a Mee Ge Sy OR re Meee a Signal EQ NW MES RENE EM EE md Line Valid Delay see Table 18 Table 19 and Table 20 AME WENT Line Valid Data Valid 347 NA HU UU or 8 bits Pixel Data X X X X2X6X10X 4X 18 X 22 X 20 XN3XN 2XN 8XN 4XN 0XN GN 2 X X X 2 12 10 or 8 bits Pixel Data 4 X X X X83XT7TXUX15 X19 X 22X 22K XN S5XN 2IXN DXN SXN 2XN EXN X X X X 2 12 10 or 8 bits Pixel Data 4 X X MK WK 4X 8B XK12 XK 16 X 20 XK 24 XK 28 X KN 24 XN 2OXN BXN 12KN B XN 4X NX X X X 2 12 10 or 8 bits Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution without horizontal binning enabled N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models N At full resolution with horizontal binning enabled N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 36 Four Tap Modes with Edge or Level Controlled Exposure 104 Basler sp
34. S4 Line Counter MSByte S5 Line Sum LSByte S6 Line Sum MidByte S7 Line Sum MSByte S8 Reserved S9 Total High Pixels LSByte S10 Total High Pixels MSByte S11 Total Low Pixels LSByte S12 Total Low Pixels MSByte S13 Contrast Value LSByte S14 Contrast Value MidByte S15 Contrast Value MSByte S16 Reserved Table 28 Stamp Pixel Functions Stamp Pixels S1 and S2 Stamp pixel S1 always has a fixed value of OxAA If the camera is set for one of the dual line acquisition modes and if the pixel values are from line A stamp pixel S2 will have a fixed value of 0x55 If the camera is set for one of the dual line acquisition modes and if the pixel values are from line B stamp pixel S2 will have a fixed value of 0x57 If the camera is set for any other line acquisition mode stamp pixel S2 will have a fixed value of 0x55 1 and S2 can be used as a data integrity check They can also be used to find the start of the stamp pixels For more information about line acquisition modes see Section 3 on page 41 148 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features Stamp Pixels S3 and S4 Stamp pixels S3 and S4 represent the least significant and most significant bytes respectively of the line counter The line counter increments by one for each line captured by the camera The counter starts at 0 and wraps at 65535 decimal The line counter is reset to 0 whenever the camera is switched off or reset The
35. The hex digits included in the read command are 0x01 0x0C 0x01 0x00 0x18 0x01 0x03 0x01 is the BFS field The value in the BFS field is always 0x01 0x0C is the FTF field The hex value of 0x0C in the FTF field converts to a binary value of 0000001100 Bits 7 through 3 of the binary value indicate the OpCode As shown in the OpCode table on page 208 an OpCode value of 0b00001 indicates that this is a read command frame Bit 2 indicates the presence or absence of a BCC in the frame As shown in the OpCode table when this bit is set to 0b1 it indicates that a BCC is present Bits 1 and 0 indicate the AddrLen As shown in the OpCode table a value of 0b00 for the AddrLen indicates that the address portion of this frame contains a 16 bit address If you check the table on page 191 you will find that the address for the Status field of the Test Image Mode CSR is 0x1800 a 16 bit address You are free to use any supported AddrLen as long as the CSR address will fit into it 0x01 is the DataLen field This field indicates the data size in bytes that will be transferred by using this read command As shown in the table on page 191 the data size for the Status field of the Test Image Mode CSR is 1 byte Note that for read commands the data size specified in the DataLen field represents the number of bytes of data that you expect to see in the response frame No data bytes are actually included in the read command 0x00 0x18 is t
36. The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the low line rate compensation mode 0x00 Low line rate compensation disabled 0x01 Low line rate compensation enabled See Section 4 1 3 on page 72 for more information about the low line rate compensation mode Basler sprint Mono Cameras 177 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Horizontal Binning CSR Register Base Address 0x1B00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the horizontal binning mode 0x00 Horizontal binning disabled 0x01 Horizontal binning enabled See Section 3 8 on page 61 for more information about the horizontal binning feature Exposure Time Control Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x1400 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status
37. Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 12 73 us 12 84 us 15 03 us 15 14 us Edge Controlled Exposure 13 08 us 13 19 us 15 38 us 15 49 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 73 us 12 84 us 15 03 us 15 14 us Table 26 Line Valid Delay with the 8k Camera Set for a 8 Tap Video Data Output Mode 118 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 6 Features 6 1 Gain and Offset 6 1 1 Gain Gain is adjustable As shown in Figure 40 increasing the gain setting increases the slope of the camera s response curve and results in higher camera output for a given amount of light input Decreasing the gain setting decreases the slope of the response curve and results in lower output for a given amount of light Gain is adjustable on an integer scale The minimum gain setting for all video data output modes is 2731 The maximum setting is 16383 8192 or 6144 when the camera is set for an 8 bit 10 bit or 12 bit video data output mode respectively The default setting is 4096 which results in 0 dB of gain Table 27 shows the dB of gain that will be achieved at various integer settings Gain Setting 2731 minimum allowed for all modes 4096 default 6144 maximum allowed for 12 bit modes 8192 maximum allowed for 10 bit modes 16383 maximum allowed for 8 bit modes Table 27 dB of Gain at Various Settings Basler
38. about the maximum allowed line rate see Section 4 3 on page 77 When exposure averaging is set to off no exposure averaging is performed When exposure averaging is set to two or four the gray values of a series of two or four consecutive exposures respectively are captured and averaged per output line period For averaging the gray values from each line exposure are summed for each pixel and each total is divided by the number of the exposures Decimals of the resulting average pixel values are truncated and the averaged pixel values are transmitted as integers Basler sprint Mono Cameras 125 Features AW00016213000 To reduce motion blur from moving objects make sure to use bright lighting and very short exposure times Exposure Averaging and Exposure Time Control Modes The exposure times are controlled by the current Exposure Time parameter setting Note that a delay of 1 3 us follows each individual exposure see Figure 42 and Figure 43 The output line periods are controlled by the ExSync period in ExSync programmable mode and by the Line Period parameter setting in free run programmable mode You must make sure that the output line period is sufficiently long to at least fully cover the sum of the related individual exposure times with their associated delays of 1 3 us each and the line readout see Figure 42 and Figure 43 In addition when using the ExSync programmable mode the exposure start d
39. application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Line Acquisition Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the line acquisition mode to Single Line Max 70 kHz By Setting CSRs You set the line acquisition mode to single line by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Line Acquisition Mode CSR see page 177 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 42 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 3 Dual Line Max 140 kHz Acquisition Modes Note The Dual Line Max 140 kHz acquisition modes are only available on spL2048 140km and spL4096 140km cameras Two dual line acquisition modes are available Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line A First Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line B First When Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line A First acquisition modes is active the camera will use both line A and line B When an acquisition is triggered both lines in the sensor are exposed When exposure is complete the pixel values from the line A are read out of the sensor and transmitted from the camera While the pixel values from line A are being read out the values from line B are also read out but they are held in a buffer in the camera The next time that an acquisition is triggered the pixels from line B are transmitted but no exposure
40. are analogous Basler sprint Mono Cameras 29 Physical Interface AW00016213000 2 3 Connector Types 2 3 1 26 pin Connectors Each 26 pin connector on the back of the camera is a female 0 050 inch MDR connector as called for in the Camera Link specification 2 3 2 6 pin Connector The 6 pin connector on the camera is a Hirose micro miniature locking receptacle part number HR10A 7R 6PB or the equivalent The recommended mating connector is the Hirose micro miniature locking plug part number HR10A 7P 6S A plug of this type should be used to terminate the cable on the power supply for the camera A power supply that has an output cable terminated with the correct connector is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative for more information 30 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Physical Interface 2 4 Cabling Requirements 2 4 4 Camera Link Cable The Mini D Ribbon MDR cables used between the camera and your frame grabber must comply with the Camera Link cable specification specified in the Camera Link Standard Compliant MDR cable assemblies in several different lengths are available from Basler as stock items Contact your Basler sales representative for more information The maximum allowed length for the MDR cable used with a sprint camera is 10 meters Note Generally Camera Link cables of up to 10 m length can be used for Camera Link cameras However when operating cameras
41. by 16 will decrease the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 If the camera is set for a 10 bit video data output mode increasing the integer offset setting by 4 will increase the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 decreasing the integer offset setting by 4 will decrease the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 If the camera is set for a 12 bit video data output mode increasing the integer offset setting by 1 will increase the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 decreasing the integer offset setting by 1 will decrease the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 120 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features Setting the Offset You can set the offset with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Offset parameter in the Gain amp Offset parameters group to set the offset By Setting CSRs You set the offset by writing a value in digital numbers to the Absolute Offset field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Offset field of the Offset CSR see page 184 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and the difference between using the absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Basler s
42. byte of the max value Byte 4 Always 0x00 not used 180 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Line Period CSR Note The line period can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Line Period field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Line Period field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 174 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x1600 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Line Period Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the line period in us For example if the value in this field is set to 180 6 the line period will be 180 6 us The allowed range for the absolute line period can vary depending on the camera model and how the camera is configured You should check the absolute min and absolute max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The increment is 0 1 The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 4 2 on page 74 for more information about t
43. camera you will overwrite any existing values in the camera s user set file of the same name With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Upload button in the Configuration Set Files parameters group to upload a user set file When you click the button the CCT will open a window that lets you navigate to your PC and select a file By Setting CSRs You can upload a user set file by writing values to the configuration set bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains the bulk data CSRs and Section 7 2 3 3 on page 201 explains how to use the CSRs to upload a file Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Note The factory configuration set file can be downloaded from the camera to the PC The factory configuration set file can t be uploaded from the PC to the camera because the factory configuration set file in the camera is protected and can t be overwritten 164 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 7 Configuring the Camera The camera comes with a factory set of parameters that will work properly for most applications with only minor changes For normal operation the following parameters are usually configured by the user Video data output mode Line acquisition mode Exposure time control mode Exposure time for ExSync programmable or free run programmable exposure modes Line period for free run exposure modes To customize operation for your particular application the followi
44. case when a write command is sent to the camera the camera responds with an ACK If the camera receives a write command with an unknown or invalid address in the Address field of the frame it will respond with an ACK but will not perform the write After a write command has been issued by the host the host can verify the write by issuing a corresponding read command and checking that the returned data is as expected unless the address is write only The host can read the Camera Status fields in the Camera Status inquiry register see page 172 and check the returned data to see if an error condition has been detected Note For many of the write commands listed in the tables on page 176 through page 197 only data within a specified range or a specified group of vales is valid If the data in a write command is not within the allowed range or specified group of allowed values the camera will not execute the write command 210 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera 7 3 2 Basic Read Write Command Explanations 7 3 2 1 Read Command This section includes a text description the hex digits included in a command message used to read the Status field of the Test Image Mode CSR see page 191 The intent of this section is to give you a basic understanding of the elements included in a read command Sample code that illustrates how to send a read command is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214
45. check the power source for the camera The output must be 12 VDC 1 2 V Also make sure that the power No Replace the power source source meets the other specs shown in Section 2 5 on page 32 Is the power source OK Yes Basler sprint Mono Cameras 219 Troubleshooting and Support Check to make sure that the RS 644 serial connection see Section 2 9 on page 39 is working correctly You can do this by starting the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT When you start the tool a startup graphic should appear and then a window that shows a list of parameter settings should appear If this is the first time that you are using the tool you will see an empty window with a drop down menu at the top which says No port selected In this case use the drop down menu to select the RS 644 port that you want to use RS 644 ports are identified in the list by a name starting with clser followed by a port number Once you select the correct port the list of parameter settings should appear Did the list of parameter settings appear Yes Are you controlling the camera with an ExSync signal or is the camera in free run I ExSync signal y Check the setup on your frame grabber and make sure that the ExSync signal period is not too short The period of the ExSync signal must not be lower than the calculated minimum as explained in Section 4 3 on page 77 You can also access the line period CSR see page 181 to ch
46. counter is also reset to 0 whenever the line stamp feature is disabled Stamp Pixels S5 S6 and S7 Stamp pixels S5 S6 and S7 represent the least significant middle and most significant bytes respectively of the line sum The line sum is simply the total of all of the pixel values in the captured line The line sum does not include the 16 added stamp pixels If the AOI feature is being used the line sum is based only on the pixels within the AOI Stamp Pixel S8 Stamp pixel S8 is reserved for future use Currently its value will always be 0 Stamp Pixels S9 and S10 Stamp pixels S9 and S10 represent the least significant and most significant bytes respectively of the Total High Pixels The Total High Pixels indicates the number of pixels in the captured line that are above a camera parameter called the High Pixel Threshold see Section 6 7 1 on page 150 for information about setting this parameter As an example assume that the High Pixel Threshold is set to 200 Also assume that the camera has captured a line and that 56 of the pixels in that line have a value greater than 200 In this case the Total High Pixels in the line would be 56 The total high pixels does not include any of the 16 added stamp pixels If the AOI feature is being used the total high pixels is based only on the pixels within the AOI Stamp Pixels S11 and S12 Stamp pixels S11 and S12 represent the least significant and most significant byt
47. default the low line rate compensation is disabled The mode repeatedly reads out the sensor and discards the pixel data to ensure that a completely read out sensor is present before each line acquisition This is a prerequisite for optimum image quality At higher line rates low line rate compensation does not operate Low line rate compensation is only available for ExSync controlled operation but not for free run controlled operation where relatively high line rates are used The line rates differ at which the camera enters or leaves low line rate compensation When low line rate gives way to a high line rate the low line rate compensation stops at a line rate of 3 906 Hz 256 ms line period When low line rate is entered from a high line rate the low line rate compensation starts at a line rate of 1 953 Hz 512 ms line period When low line rate compensation operates a low line rate compensation delay of 14 2 us precedes each line acquisition in addition to exposure start delay When a low line rate gives way to a high line rate low line rate compensation stops and only the first line acquisition of the series acquired at a line rate above 3 906 Hz will be affected by the delay When exposure averaging is used see Section 6 3 on page 125 the low line rate compensation delay only precedes the first exposure of the series of exposures used for averaging 72 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Star
48. for 10 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 1023 If the camera is set for 12 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 4095 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 143 Features AW00016213000 6 6 2 Test Image Two Moving Gradient Test image two is formed with a gray scale gradient that ranges from 0 to 255 and repeats every 256 pixels as shown in Figure 47 The gradient starts at O and steps up that is the gray value of pixel 1 is 0 the gray value of pixel 2 is 1 the gray value of pixel 3 is 2 and so forth The pattern shifts by one pixel each time the ExSync signal or the camera s internal control signal cycles On the second cycle the gray value of pixel 1 is 1 the gray value of pixel 2 is 2 the gray value of pixel 3 is 3 and so on On the third cycle the gray value of pixel 1 is 2 the gray value of pixel 2 is 3 the gray value of pixel 3 is 4 and so on This shifting of the gradient makes the pattern appear to be moving as the ExSync signal or the internal control signal cycles When you view the output of a camera that is set for test image two the pattern should appear to be gradually moving up the screen This feature is useful for determining if the camera is receiving an ExSync signal from your frame grabber and if the frame grabber is receiving every line that is output from your camera 255 Gray Z L f Level A fe 4 A Om 1 line 1 Pixel Number line 2 Sse line 3 Fig 47 Formation of Test I
49. for more information about serial communication Note When changing a setting for serial communication use the following procedure 1 Issue the write command with the new setting 2 Wait one second 3 Change the setting on the frame grabber s RS 644 serial port 4 Resume communication The RS 644 serial port on some Camera Link frame grabbers will only support a bitrate of 9600 If you are using a Camera Link frame grabber check the grabber s documentation before attempting to change the bitrate At reset or power off on the camera returns to the 9600 bps setting Basler sprint Mono Cameras 197 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 2 3 Bulk Data and the Bulk Data Control and Status Registers The term bulk data refers to a collection of values used by the camera as a block A configuration set see Section 6 14 on page 159 is an example of one type of bulk data A single configuration set contains values for all of the normal parameter settings needed to configure the camera and the values within a configuration set are used by the camera as a block A set of shading values see Section 6 4 on page 128 is an examples of another type of bulk data The set of shading values contains all of the values needed to do shading correction and the camera uses the shading values as a block The camera has a file system similar to the file system used on PCs The camera can store blocks of bulk data such as a config
50. from the camera to the host PC Max Lines s CL Clk x Taps CL Readout Gap x Taps AOI Length p Where CL Cik is the set Camera Link clock speed for your camera model 40 or 80 MHz see Section 2 8 4 on page 37 Taps is the number of taps being used as determined by the current video data output mode setting see Section 5 on page 89 CL Readout Gap is the Camera Link readout gap parameter for the camera This parameter is the minimum time in Camera Link pixel clocks between the readouts of two consecutive lines This parameter depends on the Camera Link clock speed For 40 MHz 16 For 80 MHz 24 AO Length is the length of the AOI based on the current AOI length setting see Section 6 2 on page 122 p 0 if the line stamp feature is not enabled see Section 6 7 on page 146 p 16 when the line stamp feature is enabled Section 4 3 2 on page 84 includes an example that illustrates how to use these formulas to determine the maximum allowed line rate Once you have determined the maximum allowed line rate you can easily determine the minimum allowed line period 80 Min Line Period 4 Max Line Rate Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 3 1 Max Segment AOI Pixels Each sensor line in a camera is divided into segments with each segment including 2048 pixels In cameras equipped with sensors that have 2048 pixels per line each line has only one segment In cam
51. if the value in this field is set to 5 2 the exposure time will be 5 2 us The allowed range for the exposure time can vary depending on the camera model and how the camera is configured You should check the absolute min and absolute max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The increment is 0 1 The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 4 on page 69 for more information about exposure time Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute exposure time setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related features are set The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute exposure time setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related features are set The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Exposure Time Offset 0x000D Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the exposure time The allowed range for this value can vary depending on the camera model and how t
52. input power voltage greater than 25 VDC can seriously damage the camera Making or Breaking Connections Incorrectly Can Damage the Camera Be sure that all power to your camera and to your host PC is switched off before you make or break connections to the camera Making or breaking connections when power is on can result in damage to the camera or to the frame grabber If you can t switch off the power be sure that the input power plug is the last connector that you plug into the camera when making connections and the first connector that you unplug from the camera when breaking connections Basler sprint Mono Cameras 25 Physical Interface 2 1 AW00016213000 General Description of the Connections The camera is interfaced to external circuitry via connectors located on the back of the housing one or two 26 pin 0 050 inch Mini D Ribbon MDR female connectors used to transfer pixel data control data and configuration data The number of MDR connectors present on the camera varies by camera model as shown in Table 5 a 6 pin micro miniature push pull receptacle used to provide power to the camera An LED located on the back of the camera is used to indicate power present and to display the camera s status Figure 11 shows the connectors and the LED for 2k and 4k cameras The connectors and the LED for 8 k cameras are analogous Model MDR Connectors Camera Lin
53. is enabled Make sure to enable the lookup table feature before setting the gamma correction feature For more information about enabling the lookup table feature see Section 6 8 on page 151 You can set the gamma correction feature with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT Gamma correction is enabled when the value of the Gamma parameter is set to gt 0 The correction is determined by the value of the Gamma parameter which can be set in a range from 0 to 3 99902 So if the value is set to 1 2 for example the gamma used for the correction will be 1 2 140 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features By Setting CSRs You set the gamma by writing a value to the Absolute Gamma or the Raw Gamma field of the Gamma CSR see page 189 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Mono Cameras 141 Features AW00016213000 6 6 Test Images The test image mode is used to check the camera s basic functionality and its ability to transmit an image via the video data cables Test images are especially useful for service purposes and for failure diagnostics In test mode the image is generated with a software program and the camera s digital devices and does not use the optics imaging
54. largest number of AOI pixels When you are setting up the AOI on a camera with four segments 8192 pixels in each line the pixels within the AOI may all fall into one segment Or the AOI could be positioned so that some of the pixels in the AOI fall into one segment and some of the pixels in the AOI fall into a neighboring segment The Max Seg AOI Pixels is defined as the number of AOI pixels included in the segment that contains the largest number of AOI pixels Or the AOI could be positioned so that the pixels in the AOI fall into three or four segments In this case at least one complete segment will be part of the AOI and therefore the Max Seg AOI Pixels will be 2048 Consider some examples Suppose that the AOI is set to use the entire line of a 4k camera i e the AOI starting pixel is 1 and the AOI length is 4096 With these settings the number of AOI pixels in segment 1 is 2048 and the number of AOI pixels in segment 2 is 2048 The Max Seg AOI would be 2048 In any case where the number of AOI pixels that falls into each segment is the same the Max Seg AOI Pixels is simply the number of AOI pixels included in one of the segments Suppose that the AOI starting pixel is set to 1 and the AOI length is set to 256 With these settings all 256 pixels in the AOI would fall into segment 1 The number of AOI pixels in segment 1 is 256 and the number in segment 2 is 0 So the Max Seg AOI Pixels would be 256 Suppose that for a 4k camera t
55. line valid delay values in Table 12 on page 91 Table 15 on page 98 and Table 19 on page 107 Updated the description of the line stamp feature in Section 6 7 on page 146 Updated the line contrast formula on page 150 Updated the descriptions of the microcontroller firmware version and FPGA firmware version inquiry registers on page 154 Added the description of the Camera Link clock speed control and status register on page 176 AW00016205000 8 Jan 2008 Removed the section of the manual that describes camera installation The installation procedure is now available as a separate document Updated the camera version ID number stated in Section 1 1 on page 1 Updated the specification tables in Section 1 2 to include new 2k and 4k camera models Added Section 1 3 on page 6 which describes the available lens adapters Updated Section 2 1 on page 26 and Section 2 2 3 on page 29 to show the connectors available on the new camera models Updated Section 2 6 on page 33 and Section 2 8 4 on page 37 to describe the Camera Link configuration available on the new camera models Updated Section 3 on page 41 and Section 3 3 on page 43 to clarify the line acquisition modes available on each camera model Corrected the description of Vertical Binning Line Acquisition mode in Section 3 4 on page 51 and the description of the horizontal binning feature in Section 3 8 on page 61 Updated the exposure start delays listed in Tab
56. mode test image one is formed with an odd even gray scale gradient that ranges from 0 to 255 and repeats every 512 pixels as shown in Figure 45 The odd pixel gradient starts at 0 and steps up that is the gray value of pixel 1 is 0 the gray value of pixel 3 is 1 the gray value of pixel 5 is 2 and so forth The even gradient starts at 255 and steps down that is the gray value of pixel 2 is 255 the gray value of pixel 4 is 254 the gray value of pixel 6 is 253 and so forth At pixels 256 and 257 the gray value for both pixels is 128 At pixels 511 and 512 a white odd pixel is next to a black even pixel At pixels 513 and 514 a black odd pixel is next to a white even pixel To the human eye the gradient appears to be a varying gray field with a white vertical line every 512 pixels Test image one is useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above 255 amp S N S amp w N w Ni Gray amp x amp x ES M Level Ee Nes S Ne EN A N w N 0 d t N H 1 512 1024 1536 2048 4096 even odd Pixel Number Fig 45 Formation of Test Image One on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line d Fig 46 Test Image One Note When the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode the pixel values in test image one range from 0 to 255 as described above If the camera is set
57. of data in the response will be as specified by the DataLen in step 4 6 Usea binary read command to read the value in the Info field of the configuration set bulk data CSR a If the value is 0x01 no more data exists in the file Exit the procedure b If the value is 0x00 more data exists and this is not an activated file Return to step 4 c If the value is 0x04 more data exists and this is an activated file Return to step 4 Up to 255 characters can be read with a single binary bulk data read command If the file is larger than 255 characters repeated binary bulk data read commands are required When repeated bulk data read commands are required the file is read sequentially with each read command starting where the previous read stopped This procedure will download the data in the file to the host computer If you want to download a shading values bulk data file to the host PC you would use a similar procedure but you would use the shading values bulk data CSR instead Sample code that illustrates how to download a bulk data file is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214 202 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Uploading a Bulk Data File from a PC to the Camera You can upload a bulk data file from your host PC to the camera s non volatile memory As an example assume that you previously downloaded a saved configuration set file named UserSet02 to your PC Also assume that
58. parameter in the Exposure parameters group to select the free run edge controlled or free run programmable exposure time control mode The Line Period parameter is used to set the line period If you select the free run programmable mode you can use the Exposure Time parameter to set the exposure time By Setting CSRs You select the exposure time control mode by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Exposure Time Control Mode CSR see page 178 You set the line period by writing a value in us to the Absolute Line Period field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Line Period field of the Line Period CSR see page 181 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 75 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 If you select the free run programmable mode you will also need to set the exposure time You set the exposure time by writing a value in us to the Absolute Exposure Time field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Exposure Time field of the Exposure Time CSR see page 179 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and the difference between using the absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 4 2 3 Guideline When Using Free Run When using free run mode to control exposure the following guideline must be followed In the free run programmable mode the minimum exposure time and the maximum exposure time must be within the limits specified in the
59. register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the exposure time control mode 0x00 Free run programmable 0x02 Free run edge controlled 0x04 ExSync level controlled 0x05 ExSync programmable 0x06 ExSync edge controlled See Section 4 1 on page 69 for a description of the exposure time control modes 178 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Exposure Time CSR Note The exposure time can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Exposure Time field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Exposure Time field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 174 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x1500 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Exposure Time Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the exposure time in us For example
60. related to these cameras throughout the manual SpL2048 39km spL4096 20km spL8192 20km spL8192 39km Minor corrections and modification throughout the manual 230 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00016210000 13 Jul 2010 Updated U S contact address and phone number Updated the camera version ID number in Section 1 1 on page 1 Removed the requirement of a minimum line rate in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added the recommendation to generate DSNU and PRNU shading correction values in Section 6 4 5 on page 131 Added the Gamma Correction section on page 140 Added the Gamma CSR on page 189 Minor corrections in Section 7 on page 165 AW00016211000 24 May 2011 Updated the camera version ID number in Section 1 1 on page 1 Added a note about delays in Section 4 1 on page 69 Added low line rate compensation in Section 4 1 3 on page 72 Section 4 1 4 on page 73 and in the register descriptions on page 170 and page 172 Corrected the increments for starting pixels and AOI lengths applicable to setting AOls for cameras with 8192 pixels in Section 6 2 on page 122 Corrected the maximum brightness values for 10 bit and 12 bit output when gamma correction is enabled in Section 6 5 on page 140 Added the exposure averaging feature in Section 6 3 on page 125 and the related register in Section 7 2 2 on page 174 Modified the camera power un
61. s sss sasaa aaaea aeaa 26 2 2 Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering llis eee eee eee 27 2 2 1 Pin Assignments for the MDR Connectors 000 e eee eee 27 2 2 2 Pin Assignments for the 6 pin Micro miniature Receptacle 29 2 2 3 Pin Numbering eme RR ee eet ee eee eee ban 29 2 3 Connector Types xxx cae a e ede ee Ex le mee aan RAS ele py 30 2 9 1 26 pin Connectors 3 x cure ane be ed a dale ea eee ux 30 23 2 6 pin Gonnector ons ss de heh ee REX els ga de cue act eed es 30 2 4 Cabling Requirements 0 cee tees 31 2 4 1 Camera Link Cable 0 tenes 31 2 4 2 Powel Cable hw ce ge bande ee Pe edad bates Pp ENPIEES 31 2 5 Gamera POWOL ssec sce o Pese See L Eade nantes Sen o0 Ste abc LI SALES 32 2 6 Camera Link Implementation 0 0 0 0 ee 33 27 input Signals u ku eh hikiwdvs RT beiddawheeeahbidadaaw nie EE babs 35 2 71 Serialto Camera 0 0 eee 35 2 52 External Sync ExSyh C sss secus mh idea eae eee es 35 Basler sprint Mono Cameras Table of Contents AW00016213000 2 8 Output Signals a a a m m run 36 2 841 Line Valid Bit llli 36 2 8 2 Data Valid Bitirir ito vrbe EP MI REESE Arha 36 2 8 3 Pixel Data Bils z2 sessi ay sees Peas ada Pace eet wy bus 36 2 8 4 Camera Link Pixel Clock 0 0000 c eee 37 2 8 5 Serial to Frame Grabber 0000 ccc eee 38 2 9 RS 644 Serial Communication 0000 eee
62. sensor or ADCs Four test images are available Guidelines When Using Test Images When using a test image take the following guidelines into account If the camera is set for an exposure mode that uses an ExSync signal the ExSync signal must be present and must toggle in order to output a line on the test image Multiple transitions of the ExSync signal will produce a two dimensional image as shown in Figure 46 on page 143 or Figure 48 on page 144 If the camera is set for free run each cycle of the camera s internal control signal will trigger the output of a line on the test image The length of the exposure time has no effect on test images Enabling Test Images You can enable a test image with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Test Image Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to enable a test image By Setting CSRs You enable a test image by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Test Image Mode CSR see page 191 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands 142 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 6 14 Test Image One Fixed Gradient When the camera is set for an 8 bit output
63. set out of range Field Name Reset Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value of 1 0x01 to this field will initiate a camera reset The reset behavior of the camera is similar to power up behavior 196 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Serial Communication CSR An RS 644 serial connection is integrated into the Camera Link interface between the frame grabber installed in your computer and the camera The serial connection is used to issue commands to the camera for changing modes and parameters You can use the serial communication CSR to set the bitrate for the camera s RS 644 serial port The default setting is 9600 bps The setting is changed immediately after the successful receipt of this command Register Base Address 0x0D00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Bitrate Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the bit rate OxOF 9600 bps default 0x11 19200 bps 0x12 38400 bps 0x13 57600 bps 0x14 115200 bps See Section 2 9 1 on page 39 and Section 7 3 on page 206
64. setting is required because the image of the object will pass line A first Step 6 Capture images Basler sprint Mono Cameras 67 Line Acquisition Modes AW00016213000 68 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control This section describes the methods that can be used to trigger the start of exposure and control the length of exposure for each acquisition Exposure start and exposure time can be controlled via an external trigger signal ExSync applied to the camera The camera can also operate in free run In free run the camera generates its own internal control signal and does not require an ExSync signal 4 1 ExSync Controlled Operation 4 1 4 Basics of ExSync Controlled Operation In ExSync operation the camera s line rate and exposure time are controlled by an externally generated trigger ExSync signal The ExSync signal is typically supplied to the camera by a frame grabber board via the Camera Link cable You should refer to the manual supplied with your frame grabber board to determine how to set up the ExSync signal that is being supplied to the camera When the camera is operating under the control of an ExSync signal the length of the ExSync signal period determines the camera s line rate 1 Line Pati ee e TI Period The ExSync signal can be periodic or non periodic as required For simplicity no delays related to li
65. that you e mail copies of these captured images Basler sprint Mono Cameras 221 Troubleshooting and Support AW00016213000 8 4 3 Interfacing Use the interfacing troubleshooting chart if you think that there is a problem with the cables between your devices or if you have been directed here from another chart Before making or breaking any camera connections always switch off power to the system camera and host PC If you have not already do so use a voltmeter to check the power source for the camera The output must be 12 VDC 1 2 V Also make sure that the power source meets the other specs shown N Replace the in Section 2 5 on page 32 De power source Is the power source OK Yes Make sure that the cable connected to MDR Connector 1 on the camera see Figure 11 on page 26 is also connected to the base Camera Link connector on your frame grabber And make sure that the cable connected to MDR Connector 2 on the camera T is connected to the medium full Camera Link connector on your frame grabber Reseat No Exit this the cable connections at the camera and the frame grabber chart After you checked and reseated the connections is the problem still present Yes Check all of the cables in the system Check Section 2 4 on page 31 and make sure that you are using a cable that has the right characteristics and is not too long It is extremely important to use the proper cables P when you are working with Ca
66. us 9 61 us 13 41 us 13 51 us Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 53 us 9 64 us 13 43 us 13 54 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 88 us 9 99 us 13 78 us 13 89 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 53 us 9 64 us 13 43 us 13 54 us Table 20 Line Valid Delay with the 8k Camera Set for a 4 Tap Video Data Output Mode 108 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes 5 2 3 8 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode In 8 tap 8 bit output mode on each pixel clock cycle the camera transmits data for eight pixels at 8 bit depth a line valid bit and a data valid bit In the 8 tap output mode the camera uses the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X Y and Z to transmit pixel data a line valid bit a data valid bit and the Camera Link pixel clock The assignment of the bits to the output ports on Camera Link Transmitters X Y and Z is as shown in Table 21 on page 111 Table 22 on page 112 and Table 23 on page 113 respectively The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data As shown in Figure 38 on page 114 and Figure 39 on page 115 the camera samples and transmits data on each rising edge of the Camera Link clock The Camera Link pixel clock frequency is as stated in Section 2 8 4 on page 37 The line valid bit indicates that a v
67. will transmit data for pixel 8 On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 9 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 10 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 11 And data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 12 This pattern will continue until all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted After all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted the line valid and data valid bits both become low indicating that valid pixel data is no longer being transmitted Figure 36 on page 104 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in edge controlled or level controlled exposure mode Figure 37 on page 105 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in programmable exposure mode Basler sprint Mono Cameras 101 Video Data Output Modes AW00016213000 MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 4 Tap 12 Bit 4 Tap 10 Bit 4 Tap 8 Bit Port AO TxINO RxOutO DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 Port A1 TxIN1 RxOut1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 Port A2 TxIN2 RxOut2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 Port A3 TxIN3 RxOut3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 Port A4 TxIN4 RxOut4 DO Bit 4 DO Bit 4 DO Bit 4 Port A5 TxIN6 RxOut6 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 Port A6 TxIN27 RxOut27 DO Bit 6 DO Bit 6 DO Bi
68. will occur When Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line B First acquisition modes is active the camera will use both line A and line B When an acquisition is triggered both lines in the sensor are exposed When exposure is complete the pixel values from the line B are read out of the sensor and transmitted from the camera While the pixel values from line B are being read out the values from line A are also read out but they are held in a buffer in the camera The next time that an acquisition is triggered the pixels from line A are transmitted but no exposure will occur If the object being imaged will cross line A first and line B second the image of the object will cross line B first and line A second see Figure 15 on page 46 you should use the Line A First mode If the object being imaged will cross line B first and line A second the image of the object will cross line A first and line B second you should use the Line B First mode The maximum line acquisition rate when the camera is set for a dual line mode is 140 kHz at full resolution If the AOI feature is used the maximum line acquisition rate may be higher See Section 6 2 on page 122 and Section 4 3 on page 77 for more information Basler sprint Mono Cameras 43 Line Acquisition Modes AWO00016213000 Two ExSync Signal Cycles Required If you have the camera set for a dual line max 140 kHz acquisition mode and are you using an ExSync signal to trigger line acquisition you shou
69. you want to activate the factory shading value file you would following a similar procedure but use FactoryShading as the file name Sample code that illustrates how to activate a saved bulk data file is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214 Copying the Factory Shading Values File into the User Shading Values File Assume that you want to copy the shading values in the factory shading values file into the user shading values file To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserShading to the Name field of the shad ing value bulk data CSR see page 205 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field of the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x06 Setting the value to 0x06 initiates a copy function This procedure will copy the contents of the factory shading values file into the user shading values file Note that any existing data in the user shading values file will be overwritten Sample code that illustrates how to create a bulk data file is available from Basler seeSection 7 4 on page 214 200 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera 7 2 3 3 General Procedures for Working with Bulk Data CSRs Enumerating Bulk Data Files Bulk data file enumeration allows you to look through a list of the bulk data files that currently contain saved parameters As an example assume that you want to see a list of all of the config
70. 0 700 800 900 1000 Wavelength nm Fig 3 Camera Spectral Response Basler sprint Mono Cameras 11 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 1 5 Mechanical Specifications 1 5 14 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points for 2k and 4k Cameras The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides guarantee precise mounting with high repeatability The camera s dimensions in millimeters are as shown in Figure 4 on page 13 Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the front and two mounting holes on the sides as shown in the drawings 12 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 4 x M4 6 deep q AA EN 4 x M4 6 deep BASLER S3 Photosensitive surface BE G FF of the CMOS sensor 3 yl spynt 8 a e 1 g4u 1 4 A A PA i i 10 1 48 0 A 128 4 x M8 setscrews to for locking a lens g55 9 mount adapter pm 40 2 6200 reference plane i Tolerances a
71. 0 Troubleshooting and Support 8 4 4 RS 644 Serial Communication Use the serial communication troubleshooting charts if you think that there is a problem with RS 644 serial communication or if you have been directed here from another chart Before making or breaking any camera connections always switch off power to the system camera and host PC The RS 644 port used by the camera is located on the frame grabber Check the documentation for your frame grabber Make sure that you have installed all software related to the port and that the port has the following settings 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit and baud rate 9600 bps Is the port software installed and are the port settings correct Make corrections and then restart your computer Start the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT and click on the port selector drop down menu that appears below the menu bar A list will show any RS 644 port s The RS 644 available on the frame grabber RS 644 ports are identified in the list by a name port is working starting with clser followed by a port number Click on an RS 644 port in the list Yes correctly Exit Does a list of camera settings appear this chart No Does a Can t connect to the port Daraus The port is present but the CCT can not access the port the port is in use message appear Yes Make sure that no other program has access to the port No You may need to update the CCT To download the
72. 0016213000 Area of Interest Starting Pixel CSR Register Base Address 0x1000 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Starting Pixel Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the starting pixel for the area of interest AOI feature The area of interest starting pixel can be set to a minimum of 1 and the setting can be increased in increments of 32 if horizontal binning is not enabled and increments of 16 if horizontal binning is enabled If the value is set to 1 the starting pixel for the AOI will be 1 If the value is set to 33 the starting pixel for the AOI will be 33 And so on The allowed range for this value can vary depending on how the area of interest length parameter is set You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the starting pixel value Byte 2 High byte of the starting pixel value See Section 6 2 on page 122 for more information about the AOI feature Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes
73. 0b00000 indicates that this is a write command frame Bit 2 indicates the presence or absence of a BCC in the frame As shown in the OpCode table when this bit is set to 0b1 it indicates that a BCC is present Bits 1 through 0 indicate the AddrLen As shown in the OpCode table a value of 0b00 for the AddrLen indicates that the Address field in this frame contains a 16 bit address If you check the table on page 191 you will find that the address for the Mode field of the Test Image Mode CSR is 0x1801 a 16 bit address You are free to use any supported AddrLen as long as the CSR address will fit into it 0x01 Is the DataLen field This field indicates the data size in bytes that will be transferred by using this write command As shown in the table on page 191 the data size for the Mode field of the Test Image Mode CSR is 1 byte 0x01 0x18 is the Address field in little endian This field indicates the CSR address to which the data bytes will be written The little endian values of 0x01 0x18 in the address field translate to an address of 0x1801 If you check the table on page 191 you will find that 0x1801 is the address for the Mode field the Test Image Mode CSR The address for any field within a CSR is equal to the base address for the CSR plus the offset for the CSR field In this case the base address of the Test Image Mode CSR is 1800 and the offset for the Mode field is 0001 This results in an address of 1801 for the Mode fi
74. 0x01 The register is available Field Name Model Info Offset 0x0001 Size 20 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera s model number The string is zero terminated if less than 20 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 20 bytes are needed 168 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Product ID Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0300 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Product ID Offset 0x0001 Size 20 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera s product ID number The string is zero terminated if less than 20 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 20 bytes are needed Serial Number Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0400 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Serial Number Offset 0x0001 Size 20 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera s serial number The string is zero terminated if less than 20 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 20 bytes are needed Camera Version
75. 1 Configuring the Camera with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT 166 7 2 Configuring the Camera By Setting Registers liliis 167 7 24 1 Ariquiry Registers sux Sens EHE VAM e an a DIES 168 7 2 4 1 Inquiry Register Details llle 168 Vendor Information Inquiry seeem 168 Model Information Inquiry seeeenn 168 Product ID Inquiry tien itecto nite dieit 169 Serial Number Inquiry ssseeeenne 169 Camera Version Inquiry eseenem 169 Firmware Version Inquiry eennm 170 Camera Status Inquiry 170 FPGA Status Inquiry usce epic teer reo iei teg 172 Binary Command Protocol Status Inquiry 173 Imaging Sensor Temperature Inquiry eeeessss 173 7 2 2 Feature Control and Status Registers liliis 174 7 2 2 1 Raw Value Fields vs Absolute Value Fields 174 7 2 2 2 Feature Control and Status Register Details 176 Camera Link Clock Speed CSR oc eeeeeececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneaeeeeas 176 Video Data Output Mode CSR sse 176 Line Acquisition Mode CSR seen 177 Low Line Rate Compensation CSR csecsen 177 Horizontal Binning CSR seen 178 Exposure Time Control Mode CSR sse 178 Exposure Time CSRs reiini crei i dedere iiaii 179 Eine
76. 1 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the length in pixels for the area of interest AOI feature If horizontal binning is not enabled the area of interest length can be set to a minimum of 256 and increased in increments of 32 If horizontal binning is enabled the area of interest length can be set to a minimum of 128 and increased in increments of 16 If the value is set to 256 the length of the AOI will be 256 If the value is set to 288 the length of the AOI will be 288 And so on The allowed range for this value can vary depending on how the area of interest starting pixel parameter is set You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the length setting Byte 2 High byte of the length setting See Section 6 2 on page 122 for more information about the AOI feature Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the AOI length setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the AOI
77. 1249 AOI length is set to 2400 and the exposure time is set to 4 us The stamp feature and horizontal binning are disabled In the exposure averaging feature the number of exposures Nex is set to one First you must determine the max segment AOI pixels With the current settings 800 AOI pixels would be included in segment 1 and 1600 AOI pixels would be included in segment 2 In this case the max segment AO pixels is 1600 Next use the four formulas to calculate the maximum allowed line rate Formula 1 1 Max L ex Hinesi s Exposure time in s 0000013 x 1 Max Lines s 1 000004 0000013 Max Lines s 188679 Formula 2 i 160000000x n X penne Max Seg AOI Pixels 224 Max Lines s 160000000 x 2 1600 224 Max Lines s 175438 Formula 3 PPR Max Lines s AOI Length p _ 640000000 Max Lines s 240040 Max Lines s 266666 84 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control Formula 4 i CL Cik x Taps Max Lines s CL Readout gap x Taps AOI Length p 80000000 x 8 Max Lines s 24 x 8 2400 0 Max Lines s 246913 Formula 2 returns the lowest value So with the current camera settings the maximum allowed line rate would be 175438 lines per second The minimum allowed line period in this case would be 4 175438 Min Line Period Min Line Period 0 0000057 5 7 us Basler sprint Mono Cameras 85 Exp
78. 13 4 Tap 12 Bit Mode See Section 5 on page 89 for a description of the video data output modes 176 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Line Acquisition Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x3600 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the line acquisition mode 0x00 Single Line Max 70 kHz 0x02 Vertical Binning 0x03 Time Delayed Line Summing Line A Delayed 0x04 Time Delayed Line Summing Line B Delayed 0x05 Line Averaging 0x06 Time Delayed Line Averaging Line A Delayed 0x07 Time Delayed Line Averaging Line B Delayed 0x08 Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line A First 0x09 Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line B First See Section 3 on page 41 for a description of the line acquisition modes Low Line Rate Compensation CSR Register Base Address 0x4500 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01
79. 16 User defined 8 bit value e e e 4080 User defined 8 bit value 4084 User defined 8 bit value 4088 User defined 8 bit value 4092 User defined 8 bit value 4096 User defined 8 bit value Table 29 Lookup Table Basler sprint Mono Cameras 151 Features AW00016213000 When the lookup table feature is enabled the camera will operate in this manner If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 0 the 8 bit value stored at index 0 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 4 the 8 bit value stored at index 4 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 8 the 8 bit value stored at index 8 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 4084 the 8 bit value stored at index 4084 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 4088 the 8 bit value stored at index 4088 will be transmitted If the sensor reports that a pixel has a 12 bit value of 4092 the 8 bit value stored at index 4092 will be transmitted The value stored at index 4096 is used for interpolation As you can see the table does not include a user defined 8 bit value for every 12 bit value that the sensor can report If the sensor reports a 12 bit pixel value that does not have a corresponding defined 8 bit value it does a straight line interpolation between the two nearest defined values For example assume that the s
80. 187 starting pixel control and status register ssssssss 186 SEMENE 5 2 eet eere ene nera 81 B base Camera Link configuration 26 33 binary command protocol status inquiry register 173 binary read write commands 206 binning horizontal ssussse 61 bulk ata zitiert 198 bulk data registers 167 198 C Cablirig 24 eet erect gs 31 calculations design 65 camera configuration tool 166 Camera Link Cable i AE E eei 31 clock speed secies 37 clock speed control and status register sssessss 176 Camera Link implementation 33 camera pOWer sssssssee 32 camera reset control and status register seeren 196 camera status inquiry register 170 camera version inquiry register 169 OCT aioe ternal ete de 166 Basler sprint Mono Cameras Index cleaning the camera and sensor 23 cleaning the sensor ssss 23 clock speed Camera Link 37 code samples ueeeesss 214 configuration set control and status register 204 configuration sets defined 159 SAVING aeo pie ntes 161 configuration tool ssesssse 166 connectors locations x rune 26 pin assignments
81. 2 2 Feature Control and Status Register Details Camera Link Clock Speed CSR Register Base Address 0x3900 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Clock Speed Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the clock speed for the Camera Link interface 0x06 40 MHz clock speed 0x0e 80 MHz clock speed See Section 2 8 4 on page 37 for more information about the Camera Link clock speed Video Data Output Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x1700 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the video data output mode 0x01 2 Tap 8 Bit Mode 0x03 2 Tap 10 Bit Mode 0x05 2 Tap 12 Bit Mode 0x10 4 Tap 8 Bit Mode 0x11 8 Tap 8 Bit Mode 0x12 4 Tap 10 Bit Mode 0x
82. 2 Insert Screw 1 V Basler mount lt gt S 37 EE EE pr qp qr MUU S D E olore eeu suede ies MN C E E E l5 O Ha p lt lt 220 6 min ca 130 max ca 230 15 Hag 235 6 Drawing not to scale Fig 1 Using the UNIFOC 100 05 V Basler Helical Mount Distances in mm Basler sprint Mono Cameras 7 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 Attaching the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler Helical Mount to the Camera Use the four M3 setscrews supplied with the camera to attach the helical mount to the camera See Figure 8 for information where to place the M3 screws Note When screwing in the M3 screws make sure to never exceed a torque of 0 1 Nm If the torque is exceeded the helical mount can be damaged and may no longer be light proof Adjusting the Assembly of Optical Components For a reproduction ratio of 1 1 the Makro Symmar HM 5 6 120 0058 lens requires a distance of 235 6 mm between its flange and the CMOS sensor The distance to the CMOS sensor is accounted for by adding the following partial distances 15 mm distance between the CMOS sensor and the flange of the camera s V Basler mount ca 130 mm minimum extension of the helical mount 90 6 mm added extension of the helical mount by partly sliding out the insert 1 Coarsely focus on an object placed in front of the lens at working distance 212 mm by sliding the insert of the helical mount in its correct position Lock the ins
83. 3 o3 o3 o3 0 3 3 1 03 1 3 0 3 3 Y pa Y 03 X X Y o3 X do v ox Y X XY 3 3 Y 4 Y X Y 4 ExSync A E LL vov s S S e S S SN S S E S SS SS SS NS S E e OE EO A Sign iiXtiiiiiiiiiiiiiil iilii Line Valid 5 Data Valid 327 es JUUJUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU aib OOQOOGGOGGGOGOGEX9OOOOO or 8 bits D Pixel Data OOXOXOOXGOXGXG XXX X99 XX OX KKK or 8 bits Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution without horizontal binning enabled N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models N At full resolution with horizontal binning enabled N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 34 Two Tap Modes with Edge or Level Controlled Exposure Basler sprint Mono Cameras 95 Video Data Output Modes AWO00016213000 End of O Programmed 4 Time ig Line Valid Delay see Table 13 Table 14 and Table 15 H Line Valid 3 Data Valid 3 ee TU UL Clock DO Pixel Daa X X X X X3X5X7X9 X1 X13X N 19XN 11 X N 9 X N 7 X N 5 X N 3 X N 1 12 10 or 8 bits D1 Pixel Daa X X X X2X4X86X8 X1 X 12 X 14 X XN 12XN 10X N 8 XN 6 XN 4 XN 2X NX X X X 2 12 10 or 8 bits Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution without horizontal binning
84. 39 2 9 0 Making the Serial Connection 0 0 00 cee eee 39 3 Line Acquisition Modes 00 cee cece eee eee eee 41 3 4 Introduction sco Rib da ee eee eee ea eed RR ERE EE ee 41 3 2 Single Line Max 70 kHz Acquisition Mode 000 cece eee ee 42 3 3 Dual Line Max 140 kHz Acquisition Modes 0 0000 c eee eee eee 43 3 4 Vertical Binning Acquisition Mode 00 0c cece 51 3 5 Time Delayed Line Summing Acquisition Mode 0000 cee eee ee 53 3 6 Line Averaging Acquisition Mode 00 cece eee 59 3 7 Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Mode 2 000 eee eee 60 3 8 Horizontal Binning aeee ki kai pi aai e eee 61 3 9 Recommendations for Using Time Delayed Line Summing or Time Delayed Line Averaging 2 0 cece ee eee eene 63 3 9 1 Camera Operating Recommendations 0000 cee eee eee 63 3 9 2 System Design Recommendations 00000 cee eens 63 3 9 8 System Design Calculations 0 002 ee 65 4 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 69 4 1 ExSync Controlled Operation lisse 69 4 1 1 Basics of ExSync Controlled Operation 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 69 4 1 2 Selecting an ExSync Exposure Mode and Setting the Exposure Time 71 4 1 3 Low Line Rate Compensation llle eee 72 4 1 4 Guidelines When Using an ExSync Signal 00000055 73 42 Lree BRUM nl VW AREE
85. 3BXN 3OXN 22XN 14XN 6X X X X 2 its D2 Pixel Data XXX X XIXA XX AXA NIBKIAKH NX XXX D3 Pixel Data XXX Ka Xa X BX BXBXUXDX es o9 3X XXX D4 ARA C X X X X5 X13X21X 2037 X 45 X 53 X XN IXN 43XN QN ZXN 9XN 4100N 9X X X X 2 its D5 Pe paa C X X X X6X14X22X 30X 38 X 46 X 54 X XN DXN 42XN 4XN XN 18XN 0XN 2X X X X Its D6 Pixel Data XXX OCC GO GO GOGXSX X99 3X XXX D7 Pixel Data OOX DOXA KA Xe aeo 0X XXX Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution without horizontal binning enabled N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models N At full resolution with horizontal binning enabled N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 39 Eight Tap Mode with Programmable Exposure Basler sprint Mono Cameras 115 Video Data Output Modes AW00016213000 5 2 3 2 Line Valid Delays for 8 Tap Output Modes The table below shows the line valid delay see Figure 38 on page 114 and Figure 39 on page 115 when the camera is set for full resolution and an 8 tap video data output mode Note that the delay depends on the line acquisition mode setting the Camera Link clock speed and whether horizontal binning is enabled The delay also depends on whether the camera is a 2k 4k or 8k camera Each line delay can vary slightly within the stated minimum and maximum delays 2k
86. 4 LSBs will be packed with zeros 146 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features If the line stamp feature is used together with the AOI feature see Section 6 2 on page 122 the stamp pixels are transmitted immediately after the last pixel in the AOI as shown in Figure 50 The figure illustrates what you would see if the AOI was set for a starting pixel of 33 and a length in pixels of 256 The line valid and data valid signals will be high while the pixels in the AOI and the stamp pixels are transmitted ExSync E PE Signal e e E E A ee Ok NECNON L e Line Valid Data Valid Pixel DO pel XXX XK XE G9 G9 9696900 0OO Data x 16 Added Pixel Values from the AOI Stamp Pixel Values Fig 50 Stamp Pixels with 2 Tap Video Data Output Edge or Level Controlled Exposure and an AOI Basler sprint Mono Cameras 147 Features AW00016213000 The table below lists the function of each stamp pixel A more detailed explanation of how to interpret the pixel values follows the table Position Function S1 A fixed value of OxAA S2 A fixed value of 0x55 with camera set for dual line acquisition mode and pixels from line A A fixed value of 0x57 with camera set for dual line acquisition mode and pixels from line B A fixed value of 0x55 with camera set for any other acquisition mode S3 Line Counter LSByte
87. 7 1 on page 166 you use the File Name Select parameter and the Activate button in the User Set Files parameters group to activate a saved user set file or the factory set file By Setting CSRs You can activate a saved user set file or the factory set file by writing values to the bulk data CSR for configuration sets The bulk data activate process is used to activate a stored file Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains bulk data CSRs and using the bulk data activate process Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 162 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 14 3 Which Configuration Set File will Load at Startup or at Reset On the initial wake up after delivery the camera loads the factory configuration set into the work set At each subsequent power on or reset the configuration set file that was last activated is loaded into the work set If there is no activated file the factory set file will be loaded into the work set 6 14 4 Downloading Configuration Set Files to Your PC Once you have saved user sets to the user set files in your camera you can download the user set files to your PC You can also download the factory set file to your PC Using the download function together with the upload function that is described on the next page is useful if you want to transfer a user set file from one camera to another camera of the same type You can download a user set file or the factory set f
88. AOI is used the values for line valid and frame valid delays may be smaller or larger depending on the size and position of the AOI Note The bit depths of the video data output modes have no effect on the values for line valid and frame valid delays 5 2 1 2 Tap Output Modes 2 Tap 12 Bit Output Mode In 2 tap 12 bit mode on each pixel clock cycle the camera transmits data for two pixels at 12 bit depth a line valid bit and a data valid bit In the 2 tap output modes the camera uses the output ports on Camera Link Transmitter X to transmit pixel data a line valid bit a data valid bit and a pixel clock The assignment of the bits to the output ports on Camera Link Transmitter X is as shown in Table 12 on page 94 The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data As shown in Figure 34 on page 95 and Figure 35 on page 96 the camera samples and transmits data on each rising edge of the clock The Camera Link pixel clock frequency is as stated in Section 2 8 4 on page 37 The line valid bit indicates that a valid line is being transmitted The data valid bit indicates that valid pixel data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when the line valid and data valid bits are both high 2 Tap 10 Bit Output Mode Operation in 2 tap 10 bit mode is similar to 2 tap 12 bit mode In 10 bit mode however the two least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 10 most
89. Acquisiti on Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 20 us 3 37 us 3 80 us 3 97 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 20 us 3 37 us 3 80 us 3 97 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 20 us 3 37 us 3 80 us 3 97 us Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 05 us 3 17 us 10 05 us 10 17 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 10 us 3 22 us 10 40 us 10 52 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 05 us 3 17 us 10 05 us 10 17 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 03 us 3 15 us 10 05 us 10 18 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 03 us 3 15 us 10 05 us 10 18 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 03 us 3 15 us 10 05 us 10 18 us Table 14 Line Valid Delay with the 4k Camera Set for a 2 Tap Video Data Output Mode 98 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 8k Camera Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 8k Camera Single Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 28 us 3 41 us 3 98 us 4 11 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 33 us 3 46 us 4 33 us 4 46 us Level Co
90. Basler sprint USER S MANUAL FOR MONO CAMERAS Document Number AW000162 Version 13 Language 000 English Release Date 31 May 2013 BASLER the power of sight For customers in the U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules For customers in Canada This apparatus complies with the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in Radio Interference Regulations Pour utilisateurs au Canada Cet appareil est conforme aux normes Classe A pour bruits radio lectriques sp cifi es dans
91. Bit 4 DO Bit 4 Port A5 TxIN6 RxOut6 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 DO Bit 5 Port A6 TxIN27 RxOut27 DO Bit 6 DO Bit 6 DO Bit 6 Port A7 TxIN5 RxOut5 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 MSB Port BO TxIN7 RxOut7 DO Bit 8 DO Bit 8 D1 Bit 0 Port B1 TxIN8 RxOut8 DO Bit 9 DO Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 1 Port B2 TxIN9 RxOut9 DO Bit 10 Not Used D1 Bit2 Port B3 TxIN12 RxOut12 DO Bit 11 MSB Not Used D1 Bit 3 Port B4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D1 Bit 8 D1 Bit 8 D1 Bit 4 Port B5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D1 Bit 9 D1 Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 5 Port B6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D1 Bit 10 Not Used D1 Bit 6 Port B7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D1 Bit 11 MSB Not Used D1 Bit 7 MSB Port CO TxIN15 RxOut15 D1 Bit 0 D1 Bit 0 Not Used Port C1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D1 Bit 1 D1 Bit 1 Not Used Port C2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D1 Bit 2 D1 Bit 2 Not Used Port C3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D1 Bit 3 D1 Bit 3 Not Used Port C4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D1 Bit 4 D1 Bit 4 Not Used Port C5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D1 Bit 5 D1 Bit 5 Not Used Port C6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D1 Bit 6 D1 Bit 6 Not Used Port C7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D1 Bit 7 D1 Bit 7 Not Used LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid Line Valid Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used Not Used Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Data Valid Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Not Used Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Table 12 Bit Assignments for 2 Tap Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X 94 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes ras area aan ea eed VO o 3 3 3
92. CT communicates via the RS 644 serial connection that is integrated into the Camera Link interface between the frame grabber and the camera The tool automatically generates the binary programming commands that are described in Section 7 2 on page 167 The Installation and Setup Guide for Camera Link Cameras includes detailed information about installing the CCT and includes instructions that describe how to use the CCT to change the camera s parameters The guide is available in the downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com Note In demo mode the CCT does not cover the full fuctionality of the camera We therefore recommend not to use the CCT in demo mode 166 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera 7 2 Configuring the Camera By Setting Registers The camera has blocks of mapped memory space known as registers By reading values from the registers you can determine basic information about the camera and information about the camera s current parameter settings By writing values to the registers you can set camera parameters and control how the camera s features will operate There are three types of registers in the camera Inquiry Registers these registers provide basic information about the camera Section 7 2 1 on page 168 explains inquiry registers in more detail lists the inquiry registers in the camera and describes the function of each register Feature Control and Status R
93. Cameras 199 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 2 3 2 Using the Shading Values Bulk Data CSR Activating the User Shading Values File or the Factory Shading Values File The process of activating the user shading value file or the factory shading value file accomplishes two things It copies the values from the file into the camera s volatile memory This means that the values will now be actively used by the camera It creates a link to the activated file If the camera is reset or if it is powered off and then back on the shading values from the activated file will be loaded into volatile memory of the camera and actively used by the camera when shading correction is enabled As an example assume that you have generated user shading values and that you want to activate the user shading values file To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserShading to the Name field of the shad ing value bulk data CSR see page 205 2 Usea binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the shading value bulk data CSR to 0x05 Setting the value to 0x05 initiates an activate function This procedure would find the Usershading file in the non volatile memory and would copy the values in the file into the camera s volatile memory It would also create a link to the file so that the values in the file would be loaded into volatile memory after a reset or a power up If
94. Check Character BCC The use of a BCC is optional BCC Code Function ObO This frame and also the response frame contains no BCC field 0b1 This frame and also the response frame contains a BCC field The AddrLen portion of the FTF field indicates the size of the command and status register CSR address to which the command is being sent AddrLen Length of the Address Field 0b00 16 bits 2 bytes 0b01 32 bits 4 bytes 0b10 48 bits 6 bytes 0b11 64 bits 8 bytes All CSR addresses are 16 bits Example of an FTF field Assume that you are issuing a write command that you are using a BCC and that the CSR address you are writing to is a 16 bit address In this case the OpCode bits would be 0500000 the BCC Code bit would be 0b1 and the AddrLen bits would be 0b00 This would result in a binary value of 06000001 00 which translates to a hex value of 0x04 for the FTF field Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera DataLen Address Data BCC BFE Data Length field For read commands the DataLen field indicates the number of bytes to read from the given CSR address For write commands the DataLen field indicates the number of bytes contained in the Data field Size 1 byte Range of possible settings 0 to 255 DataLen 0 will result in an ACK but no further command will be executed Address field For read commands indic
95. Delay with the 2k Camera Set for a 8 Tap Video Data Output Mode 116 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 4k Cameras Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Delays for 8 Tap Modes 4k Cameras Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 64 us 9 76 us 13 44 us 13 56 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 99 us 10 11 us 13 79 us 13 91 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 64 us 9 76 us 13 44 us 13 56 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 62 us 9 76 us 13 42 us 13 56 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 62 us 9 76 us 13 42 us 13 56 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 62 us 9 76 us 13 42 us 13 56 us Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 12 65 us 12 75 us 14 88 us 14 97 us Edge Controlled Exposure 13 00 us 13 10 us 15 23 us 14 32 us Level Controlled Exposure 12 65 us 12 75 us 14 88 us 14 97 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 12 64 us 12 75 us 14 86 us 14 98 us
96. E n Ud ZZ an due i M opa P N i EH I pe I es f on Ban Sync oxy i Nee Irs ox l oxy sl 5 EE en isl TON l wed 20 X is Si l MEJ I WN J z 5 I pe I 6 l erx Das N ap 824 8 8 JIE Hi 1 10 TWA RJ A ul ex d N E a OX D l Au l Z I amp 5 ixi PEN ION l WA ae 5 d gt nox o i eal pem E zx Is m 8r a rs Ya lo 2x I oxi 8i ae era H as I Dies Hoza E I a i Ex ma al 7n l ERU oan Sd nu 7H Jod i ZO vod ed E I 2 oxy IB 9 TEN javay 9 HHO 15 J E ux 85 J ves d Wa 7 Z To I eqqeio ZH206Sd I umi E In bee a pod 0ra spa v sg l o I 28 int weld l m xL H uod pas pr ob gi ESE N i ox B 0H Hed l waved Mis ued id l L Iv vod n pxl i Ea HO bey lo n zx BVH i032 o uo d xL d l iseuuoo w 0z A Ls a l _2a ed zva Spal 4 a l eX Sox 3 l us equ zu HE x o jm Fy J Rm MA auu d XH m 5 d ee PUN Kn zowg Sea ae E ve l Dx za EE Kar sey EO mg l I Sv uod on u ET n GO iod OR PEL I py Hog om u l ozi volod l 06Sa vod in zied E LAR 0 uod jens oy T I 7 enu ZO Wed pana ux l x x ELS be 9 Tod juud Ov vod Sz 7 2x m 6 uds l oxy 38 l x o uod I xr 5 zi EL l xao k paed ea va uog P 293 VI z l 7 a Hod 882320 z l Lex zav esa h eg ve lod z XL Ta vod st 0X ox E 98 ED XL usd Od e qe2 D ex Bl vod YaN zx Miia XL 2 d l OxL as X49 Hod L JUR ES ov Hod 4906S te Ba sler sprint Mono C ame ras 34 AW00016213000 Physical
97. Features AW00016213000 6 4 8 Downloading a Shading Values File to Your PC Once you have generated a set of user shading values in the user shading values file as described in Section 6 14 1 on page 161 you can download the user shading values file to your PC You can also download the factory shading values file to your PC Using the download function together with the upload function that is described on the next page is useful if you want to transfer a user shading values file from one camera to another camera of the same type You can download the user or the factory shading values file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the File Name Select parameter in the Shading Files parameters group to select the user shading values file or the factory shading values file and use the Download button to download the selected file By Setting CSRs You can download the user or the factory shading values file by writing values to the shading values bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains the bulk data CSRs and Section 7 2 3 3 on page 201 explains how to use the CSRs to download a file Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 138 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 4 9 Uploading a Shadin
98. Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the low pixel limit This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 2 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the low pixel limit This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 2 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the low pixel limit setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment 192 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Line Stamp High Pixel Threshold CSR Register Base Address 0x2B40 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of rang
99. Firmware Version Inquiry the FPGA Firmware Version Inquiry and the FPGA Configuration Version Inquiry registers in Section 7 2 1 1 on page 168 Added the Firmware Version Inquiry register in Section 7 2 1 1 on page 168 Additions and corrections in the Configuration Set and Shading Values CSRs in Section 7 2 3 4 on page 204 Added Erase and corrected the enumeration for Activate in the Control fields Corrected the value for This is an activated file in the Info fields Added the allowed file names to the File Name fields Updated the minimum difference between the exposure time and the ExSync period in Section 8 4 1 on page 219 Minor corrections and modification throughout the manual Basler sprint Mono Cameras 229 Revision History AW00016213000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00016207000 18 Dec 2008 Corrected the tolerances for the distance between the CMOS sensor and the front surface of the lens adapter mount for 2k and 4k cameras in Figure 4 on page 13 and Figure 5 on page 14 Improved the indications of the reference planes for the camera housings in Figure 4 on page 13 through Figure 6 on page 15 and Figure 8 on page 17 through Figure 10 on page 19 Corrected the minimum gain value in Section 7 2 2 1 on page 174 Expanded Section 8 1 on page 215 and added Section 8 2 on page 215 describing how to obtain an RMA number AW00016208000 9 Apr 2009 Added references to the table with
100. K NAK When the camera receives a frame it checks to see if the order of the bytes in the frame is correct If the FTF field indicates that the frame includes a BCC the camera checks to see if the XOR sum of the relevant frame fields matches the block check character The camera also checks to see if the number of bytes in the data field is equal to the number specified in the DataLen field If all checks are correct an ACK is sent to the host If any check is incorrect a NAK is sent Byte Timeouts The camera checks the time between the receipt of each byte in the frame If the time between any two bytes exceeds 0 5 seconds the camera enters a garbage state and discards any more incoming bytes The camera remains in this state until it sees a new BFS Read Commands In the normal case when a read command is sent to the camera the camera responds with an ACK and a returned frame The returned frame will contain the data requested If the camera receives a read command with an unknown or invalid address in the Address field of the frame it will respond with an ACK but will send no frame If the host sends a read command and gets no ACK NAK the host can assume that no camera is present or the camera is in a garbage state for some reason If the host sends a read command and gets an ACK NAK but does not receive a frame within 500 ms the host can assume that there was a problem with the read command Write Command In the normal
101. Length lt 2049 If you are working with a camera that has sensor lines with 8192 physical pixels and you enable horizontal binning you effectively reduce the resolution to 4096 binned pixels In this case you would set the AOI as if you were working with a sensor that actually has 4096 pixels and the guidelines for working with this situation would be The AOI Starting Pixel can be set to 1 and can be increased in increments of 32 e g it can be set to 1 33 65 etc The AOI Length must be a minimum of 128 pixels can be increased in increments of 32 e g the length can be set to 128 160 192 etc The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt 4097 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 123 Features AW00016213000 6 2 1 Setting the AOI You can set the AOI with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the AOI Starting Pixel parameter and the AOI Length parameter in the AOI parameters group to set the AOI By Setting CSRs You set the AOI starting pixel by writing a value to the Starting Pixel field of the AOI Starting Pixel CSR see page 186 You set the AOI length by writing a value to the Length field of the AOI Length CSR see page 187 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explan
102. N IXN 2XN 21XN 13X N 5X X X X 2 8 bits _ D3 Pixel Data X X X XX 4 X12 X 20 XK 28 X36 X 44 X 52 X XN 52XN 4XN 6XN 8XN 20XN 12X 4X X X A 8 bits _ D4 Pixel Data X X X X 5 X t3 21 X 29X 37 X 45 X 53 X XN 5IXN 43XN 35XN 27XN 19XN 11 XN 3X X X X 2 8 bits DS Pixel Data X X X XX 6X 14 X 22 X 30 X 38 X 46 X 54A X XN OXN QXN SN GXN GXN ON 20 X X X 2 8 bits D6 Pixel Data X X X X7 X t5 X 23 X 31 39 X 47 X 55 X XN 9XN IXN SXN SXN TXN N X X X X 2 8 bits D7 Pikal Data ag X ox 149 000 Xa XX KK UK LEK LAKK NOX O A A A Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution without horizontal binning enabled N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models N At full resolution with horizontal binning enabled N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 38 Eight Tap Modes with Edge or Level Controlled Exposure 114 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes End of eo Programmed 4 Time I Line Valid Delay see Table 24 Table 25 and Table 26 Line Valid F Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel Data X X X X X9X1U7X25X33X 41 X 49 X XN 55 XN 47X N 39XN 31XN 23XN 15X N 7X X X X 2 8 bits D1 artes C X X X MK 2K 10 X 18 X 26 X 34 X 42 X 50X XN SAXN 46X N
103. Period Note that the ExSync signal is edge sensitive and therefore must toggle In order for the camera to detect a transition from low to high the ExSync signal must be held high for at least 1 3 us when the camera is set for the level controlled exposure mode and for 100 ns when the camera is set for programmable or edge controlled exposure mode If the enhanced raw line acquisition mode is selected in ExSync operation the Valid for the spL2048 140km and for the spL4096 140km only maximum line rate for these camera models is 137 kHz Basler sprint Mono Cameras 35 Physical Interface AW00016213000 2 8 Output Signals Data is output from the camera in accordance with the Camera Link standard The camera s output signals include pixel data qualifiers such as line valid and data valid pixel data a Camera Link clock signal and a SerTFG signal 2 8 1 Line Valid Bit As shown in Figure 13 on page 34 a line valid LVAL bit is assigned to the Tx24 pin on the X Y and Z Camera Link transmitters as defined in the Camera Link standard The line valid bit included in the video data output from the camera indicates that a valid line is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when this bit is high For more detailed information about the line valid bit see Section 5 on page 89 2 8 2 Data Valid Bit As shown in Figure 13 on page 34 a data valid DVAL bit is assigned to the Tx26 pin on the X Y and Z Camera Li
104. Period CSR eiu iom rece eee adea eie ee eee raid 181 CUAR CSR vegeta enced 183 OM RP 184 Area of Interest Starting Pixel CSR sse 186 Area of Interest Length CSR sese 187 Exposure Averaging Control Mode CSR 188 Shading Mode CSR ccssceccsseeceesseceeeeeeeeeeneaeenenseeeeesneneeeeneneeees 188 Shading Value Generate CSR eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenneeeeeeneeeees 189 Gamma Gs esc mien trees de nS 189 Test Image Mode CSR x eel ee etd 191 Line Stamp Mode CSR sese 191 Line Stamp Low Pixel Limit CSR eeeeeeees 192 Line Stamp High Pixel Threshold CSR eeeeeeeses 193 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Table of Contents Lookup Table Mode CSR 0 cee eeececeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeneeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeas 194 Lookup Table Index CSR ooo eeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeseaeeeeseneeeeseneeeeeeas 195 Lookup Table Value CSR ooo eeeeececeeseneeeeseneeeteeneeeeseneeeeeeneeeeeens 196 Camera Reset OSR iuncti aie 196 Serial Communication CSR ssesseseeeeeeeeeeenenne 197 7 2 3 Bulk Data and the Bulk Data Control and Status Registers 198 7 2 3 1 Using the Configuration Set Bulk Data CSR 198 7 2 3 2 Using the Shading Values Bulk Data CSR 200 7 2 8 8 General Procedures for Working with Bulk Data CSRs 201 7 2 3 4 A Bulk Data Co
105. Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the shading correction mode 0x00 Shading correction disabled 0x01 Enable DSNU shading correction only 0x02 Enable PRNU shading correction only 0x03 Enable DSNU and PRNU shading correction See Section 6 4 on page 128 for more information about the shading correction feature 188 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Shading Value Generate CSR Register Base Address 0x2100 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x02 The generation process failed 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Generate Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the shading correction mode 0x00 No generation 0x01 Generate DSNU correction values 0x02 Generate PRNU c
106. Section 7 3 1 on page 207 6 Reserved 7 An unknown error has occurred Imaging Sensor Temperature Inquiry Register Base Address 0x2710 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Temperature Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description The value in this field indicates the temperature of the imaging sensor in C The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Basler sprint Mono Cameras 173 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 2 2 Feature Control and Status Registers The feature control and status registers CSRs let you set the parameters for camera features such as exposure mode gain offset and the AOI These registers also let you check the current parameter settings and the status for each feature Each feature has one or more CSRs associated with it The fields within a feature s CSR s are used to control how the feature operates By using binary write commands to write to fields within a feature s CSR s you can change the parameter settings for the feature By using binary read commands you can determine the current setting for the parameters and get information about the feature s status The address for any field withi
107. The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Basler sprint Mono Cameras 189 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Register Base Address 0x4300 Field Name Raw Gamma Offset 0x000D Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the gamma correction value The value represents a multiplier and the actual gamma correction value is equal to the value in this field times 65536 i e 0x10000 For example if the value in this field is set to 2 then Gamma 65536 x 2 Gamma 131072 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 Mid byte of the raw value Byte 3 High byte of the raw value Byte 4 Always 0 not used The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x0011 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gamma setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 Mid byte of the min value Byte 3 High byte of the min value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0015 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gamma setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 Mid byte of the ma
108. Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the starting pixel setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the starting pixel setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the starting pixel setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment 186 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Area of Interest Length CSR Register Base Address 0x100A Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Length Offset 0x000
109. a Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 8 Tap 8 Bit Port GO TxINO RxOutO D6 Bit 0 Port G1 TxIN1 RxOut1 D6 Bit 1 Port G2 TxIN2 RxOut2 D6 Bit 2 Port G3 TxINS RxOut3 D6 Bit 3 Port G4 TxIN4 RxOut4 D6 Bit 4 Port G5 TxIN6 RxOut6 D6 Bit 5 Port G6 TxIN27 RxOut27 D6 Bit 6 Port G7 TxIN5 RxOut5 D6 Bit 7 MSB Port HO TxIN7 RxOut7 D7 Bit 0 Port H1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D7 Bit 1 Port H2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D7 Bit 2 Port H3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D7 Bit 3 Port H4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D7 Bit 4 Port H5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D7 Bit 5 Port H6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D7 Bit 6 Port H7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D7 Bit 7 Spare TxIN15 RxOut15 Not Used Spare TxIN18 RxOut18 Not Used Spare TxIN19 RxOut19 Not Used Spare TxIN20 RxOut20 Not Used Spare TxIN21 RxOut21 Not Used Spare TxIN22 RxOut22 Not Used Spare TxIN16 RxOut16 Not Used Spare TxIN17 RxOut17 Not Used LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutCIk Pixel Clock Table 23 Bit Assignments for 8 Tap Output Mode MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Z Basler sprint Mono Cameras Video Data Output Modes 113 Video Data Output Modes AW00016213000 ee JUV UUU UU U UU UU UU DO Pixel Data X X X 1X9 X 17X 25 X 33 X 41 X 49 X XN 55 XN 47X N 39XN 31 XN 23XN 15X N 7K X X X 8 bits _ Di Pixel Data X X X X 2X 10 X 18 X26 X 34 X 42 X 50 X XN 5AXN 4BX N 3BXN 2OXN 22XN 14X N BX X X XK 8 bits D2 Pixel Data X X X X 3X 11X19 X 27 X 35 X 43 X 51 X XN 53XN 4X
110. abber to determine if it is compatible Basler sprint Mono Cameras 37 Physical Interface AW00016213000 2 8 5 Serial to Frame Grabber The Serial To Frame Grabber SerTFG output signal is an RS 644 LVDS signal as specified in the Camera Link standard The signal is output from the camera on pins 8 and 21 of MDR connector one as specified in the standard and as shown in Table 6 on page 27 and in Figure 13 on page 34 Signals from the SerTFG output are used during camera configuration For more detailed information about the serial connection see Section 2 9 on page 39 and Section 7 3 on page 206 38 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Physical Interface 2 9 RS 644 Serial Communication The camera is equipped for RS 644 serial communication via a serial port integrated into the frame grabber as specified in the Camera Link standard The RS 644 serial connection in the Camera Link interface is used to issue commands to the camera for changing modes and parameters The serial link can also be used to query the camera about its current setup The Basler Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT is a convenient graphical interface that can be used to change camera modes and parameters via the serial connection The configuration tool is installed on your host PC as described in the Installation and Setup Guide for Camera Link Cameras The guide is available in the downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com Basler has als
111. al response sees 11 standard shading correction 128 status checks sessssss 158 synchronication signal see ExSync signal 69 T technical support ssec 215 temperalure 3 redeem 20 test image 235 Index mode control and status register 191 test images eessseeeeeeeee 142 time delayed line averaging acquisition mode 60 line summing acquisition mode 53 troubleshooting essercene 218 two tap video data output modes 92 U undervoltage protection 155 V vendor info inquiry register 168 ventilation iiie tite 20 vertical binning acquisition mode 51 video data output mode control and status register 176 video data output modes 89 video data sequence 2 tap output modes 93 4 tap output modes 101 8 tap output modes 109 W weight 2k cameras 35 frites teat eee 2 4k cameras eeeeeeeeeeeee 3 4 BK cameras ssssseeeeeee 5 236 AW00016213000 Basler sprint Mono Cameras
112. alid line is being transmitted The data valid bit indicates that valid pixel data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when the line valid and data valid bits are both high Note The video data output mode that you select may affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate See Section 4 3 on page 77 The data sequence outlined below along with Figure 38 on page 114 and Figure 39 on page 115 describes what is happening at the inputs to the Camera Link transmitters in the camera 5 2 3 1 Video Data Sequence for 8 Tap 8 Bit Mode When the camera is not transmitting valid data the line valid and data valid bits sent on each cycle of the pixel clock will be low After the camera has completed a line acquisition it will begin to send data On the clock cycle where valid pixel data transmission begins the line valid and data valid bits both become high Eight data streams DO through D7 are transmitted in parallel during this clock cycle On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 1 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 2 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 3 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 4 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 5 Data stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 6 Data stream D6 will transmit data for pixel 7 And data stream D7 will transmit data for pixel 8 The pixel data will be at 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line vali
113. allows you to read the error flags Register Base Address 0x0C00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available continued on the next page 170 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Register Base Address 0x0C00 Field Name Camera Status Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Each bit in this field except bit 21 specifies an error condition see table below Bit 0 is the least significant bit If a bit is set to 1 the error condition assigned to that bit is present If the bit is set to O the error is not present Bit 0 1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 31 Description Reserved The camera is busy performing an internal operation such as generating shading values A reset has occurred Parameter error For example a parameter has been set to a value that is out of range or not allowed A black image is produced all pixel values are equal to zero A user set load has failed A file operation has failed A camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition is present see Section 6 11 2 on page 157 A binary read write command protocol error has been detected For more information about the error read the Binary Command Protocol Statu
114. am for your area Technical support contact information is located in the title pages of this manual You will also find helpful information such as frequently asked questions downloads and application notes on the Basler website at www baslerweb com indizes beitrag_index_en_22089 html If you do decide to contact Basler technical support please take a look at the form that starts on page 225 before you call Filling out this form will help make sure that you have all of the information the technical support team needs to help you with your problem You will also find helpful information such as frequently asked questions downloads and technical notes at our website www baslerweb com 8 2 Obtaining an RMA Number Whenever you want to return material to Basler you must request a Return Material Authorization RMA number before sending it back The RMA number must be stated in your delivery documents when you ship your material to us Please be aware that if you return material without an RMA number we reserve the right to reject the material You can find detailed information about how to obtain an RMA number on the Basler website at www baslerweb com Basler sprint Mono Cameras 215 Troubleshooting and Support AW00016213000 8 3 Fault Finding Using the Camera LED During bootup the camera loads firmware and performs initial self checks Once bootup is complete the camera performs a continuous series of self checks If an erro
115. amera because the factory shading values file in the camera is protected and can t be overwritten Basler sprint Mono Cameras 139 Features AW00016213000 6 5 Gamma Correction The gamma correction feature lets you modify the brightness of the pixel values output by the camera s sensor to account for a non linearity in the human perception of brightness To accomplish the correction a gamma correction factor y is applied to the brightness value Y of each pixel according to the following formula Y Yy uncorrected Y corrected Y my max max The formula uses uncorrected and corrected pixel brightnesses that are normalized by the maximum pixel brightness The maximum pixel brightness with gamma correction enabled equals 255 for 8 bit output and is constrained for technical reasons to 1020 for 10 bit output and 4080 for 12 bit output When the gamma correction factor is set to 1 the output pixel brightness will not be corrected Agamma correction factor between 0 and 1 will result in increased overall brightness anda gamma correction factor greater than 1 will result in decreased overall brightness In all cases black output pixel brightness equals 0 and white output pixel brightness equals 255 for 8 bit output 1020 for 10 bit output and 4080 for 12 bit output will not be corrected Enabling Gamma Correction and Setting the Gamma Note The gamma correction feature will only operate when the lookup table feature
116. appropriate settings so that it can open and use the port Consult your frame grabber s documentation to determine the port access method and the port characteristics Basler sprint Mono Cameras 39 Physical Interface 40 AW00016213000 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 3 Line Acquisition Modes This section describes the line acquisition modes available on the camera 3 1 Introduction Several different methods can be used to acquire capture lines with the sensor in the camera Each of these different methods is referred to as a line acquisition mode The line acquisition modes include Single Line Max 70 kHz Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line A First spL2048 140km and spL4096 140km only Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line B First spL2048 140km and spL4096 140km only Vertical Binning Time Delayed Line Summing Line A Delayed Time Delayed Line Summing Line B Delayed Line Averaging Time Delayed Line Averaging Line A Delayed Time Delayed Line Averaging Line B Delayed The line acquisition modes are described in detail from Section 3 2 on page 42 through Section 3 5 on page 53 To understand the line acquisition modes you must be aware of the architecture of the sensor Refer to Figure 6 on page 15 for 2k and 4k cameras and to Figure 10 on page 19 for 8k cameras When you examine a figure notice that the sensor contains two lines that are adjacent to each other and are oriented along the center line of the camera Also notic
117. at pixel clock speeds of 80 MHz we strongly recommend to use shorter cables to ensure the integrity of data transmission e g 6 m cables Keep in mind that the maximum usable cable length not only depends on the Camera Link clock speed but also on other factors as for example on the capabilities of the frame grabber and on the harshness of the electromagnetic environment 2 4 2 Power Cable A Hirose 6 pin locking plug will be shipped with each camera This plug should be used to connect the output cable on your power supply to the camera For proper EMI protection the power supply cable that is terminated with the Hirose connector and attached to the camera must be a twin cored shielded cable Also the Hirose plug must be connected to the cable shield and the shield must be connected to earth ground at the power supply An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the Camera s 6 pin Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 6 pin connector must be a plug for 6 pins Using a plug designed for a smaller or a larger number of CAUTION pins can damage the pins in the camera s 6 pin connector Basler sprint Mono Cameras 31 Physical Interface AW00016213000 2 5 Camera Power Camera power must be supplied to the camera s 6 pin connector via a cable from your power supply Nominal camera power voltage is 12 VDC 10 with less than one percent ripple Power consumption is as shown in Table 1 on page 2 The camera ha
118. ates the CSR address for the read For write commands indicates the CSR address for the write Size Number of bytes indicated in the AddrLen portion of the FTF field Data field For read commands this field contains no data For wire commands this field contains the data to be written to the CSR Size for read commands 0 bytes Size for write commands the number of bytes indicated in the DataLen field of the frame Block Check Character field The use of a block check character in read write commands is optional If bit 2 of the FTF field is 0 the BCC is not used and the BCC field will contain no data If bit 2 of the FTF field is 1 the BCC field will contain the block check character Size 0 bytes if bit 2 of the FTF field is 0 1 byte if bit 2 of the FTF field is 1 The block check character is the exclusive or sum XOR sum of the bytes in the FTF DataLen Address and Data fields see Section 7 3 2 3 on page 213 Binary Frame End field Identifies the end of a binary frame Size 1 byte The value of the BFE byte is always 0x03 ACK NAK Response Positive frame acknowledge negative frame acknowledge D Size 1 byte The value for a positive frame acknowledgement ACK is 0x06 and for a negative frame acknowledgement NAK is 0x15 Note All values are formatted as little endian Intel format Basler sprint Mono Cameras 209 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 3 1 1 Error Checking and Responses AC
119. ation of using read write commands 124 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 3 Exposure Averaging The exposure averaging feature is only available for 2k and 4k cameras Averaging pixel values for each pixel improves the signal to noise ratios of the resulting pixel values The exposure averaging feature is particularly useful when the lighting is sufficiently intense to allow several short exposures within the desired output line period The exposure averaging feature lets you obtain a captured line that is the average of a set number of consecutive line exposures These exposures are all acquired within a single output line period as defined by an ExSync signal or by the line period parameter Only the line with the averaged pixel values is transmitted out of the camera The exposure averaging feature can only be used for the following modes Line acquisition mode Single Line Exposure time control modes ExSync programmable mode Free run programmable mode For more information about the Single Line line acquisition mode see Section 3 2 on page 42 For more information about exposure time control modes see Section 4 on page 69 reached by the individual line exposures used for averaging The maximum output line rate will be lower depending on the number and exposure times of the averaged exposures The maximum allowed line rate with the current camera settings can only be For information
120. atus register 177 line acquisition modes 41 Wal ING 2 5 teens 43 line averaging eerren 59 single line max 70 KHz 42 time delayed line averaging 60 time delayed line summing 53 vertical DINNING sss 51 line averaging acquisition mode 59 line period conversion to line rate 85 line period control and status register 181 line rate and exposure averaging 125 conversion to line period 85 maximum allowed 77 maximum specified 86 line stamp iiien as 127 146 high pixel threshold control and status register 193 low pixel limit control and status register sssssse 192 mode control and status register 191 line valid bit sceessssssseees 36 line valid delay 95 118 lookup table eese 151 index control and status register 195 mode control and status register 194 value control and status register 196 low line rate compensation 72 171 172 control and status register 177 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 M maximum allowed line rate 77 maximum specified line rate
121. ay time out while it is waiting for the camera to complete 64 acquisitions and you may see a Camera is not responding error message This error is not fatal to the shading value creation process If you close the error message window wait several seconds and then click the Refresh button on the CCT the shading values will be properly created If you started the generation of the shading values using binary commands you are using an ExSync signal to trigger acquisitions and you are operating the camera at very low line rates you should be aware of a restriction The camera will not acknowledge or respond to binary commands while it is performing the 64 acquisitions needed to create a set of shading values Once you have issued the binary command to start generating shading values you should wait until the generation process is complete before you issue any further binary commands The time needed to complete the generation process will be equal to 64 times the line period 7 Once 64 acquisitions have been completed the camera calculates the DSNU values The camera uses the data from the 64 acquisitions to calculate an average gray value for the pixels in each line b The camera finds the pixel with the highest average gray value in each line c For each of the other pixels in the line the camera determines the offset that would be needed to make the pixel s average value equal to the average value for the highest pixel The ca
122. be part of the AOI and therefore the Max Seg AOI Pixels will be 2048 in this case the positioning of the AOI will not influence the result from formula two Note We recommend using an AOI that is centered on the sensor when operating the camera in dual line acquisition mode see page 41 When an AOI is centered on the sensor the number of pixels outside of the AOI will be the same on both sides of the AOI If an AOI is not centered the maximum allowed line acquisition rate may be lower than suggested by the formulas given above If you are using an AOI that is not centered determine the maximum allowed line acquisition rate via the CCT or the Line Period CSR Check the Line Period parameter in the Exposure parameter group of the CCT or check the absolute min field of the Line Period CSR see page 181 and use the line period value to calculate the maximum allowed line acquisition rate Knowing the maximum allowed line acquisition rate or the minimum line period will be particularly important when you want to operate the camera under the control of an external sync signal see page 35 Check the line period value before setting the camera to operate under the control of an external sync signal Otherwise the line period value will not be indicated Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control Max Segment AOI Pixels with Horizontal Binning If you have horizontal binning enabled see Sectio
123. bit value to the Value field of the Lookup Table Value CSR see page 196 The 8 bit value will be written to the lookup table index you selected in step one Repeat steps one and two to enter values for each index in the table See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Enabling the Lookup Table Feature You can enable the lookup table feature with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Lookup Table Enable parameter in the Lookup Table parameters group to enable the lookup table feature By Setting CSRs You enable the lookup table feature by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Lookup Table Mode CSR see page 194 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Basler sprint Mono Cameras 153 Features AW00016213000 6 9 Imaging Sensor Temperature The camera is equipped with a temperature sensor that lets you monitor the temperature of the imaging sensor You can check the temperature of the imaging sensor with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read commands from within your own application to read the camera s
124. can correct for the variations caused by PRNU The Factory Shading Value File and the User Shading Value File To perform DSNU and PRNU shading correction the camera needs a set of DSNU and PRNU shading correction values The camera has two files in its nonvolatile memory where it stores the values that it needs to perform shading correction Basler sprint Mono Cameras 129 Features AW00016213000 The first shading values file is called the factoryshading file This file contains a complete collection of the values needed to perform both DSNU shading correction and PRNU shading correction The values in this file are generated during the camera s factory setup procedure and they essentially serve as default shading values The values in the factory file are optimized for performing shading correction with standard optics and lighting Using the factory settings will give you reasonable DSNU and PRNU shading correction performance in most situations The factory shading values file is in a protected area of the camera s memory and can t be changed One advantage of the factory values is that they serve as a good default The second shading values file is called the usershading file This file can also hold a complete collection of the values needed to perform both DSNU and PRNU shading correction The values stored in this file must be generated by the camera user while the camera is operating under its real world conditions This file
125. chart in Section 8 4 2 on page 221 Before making or breaking any camera connections always switch off power to the system camera and host PC Connect the power source to the camera and then check the LED on the back of the camera Is the LED lit constantly Use a voltmeter to check the power Source for the camera The output must be 12 VDC x 1 2 V Also make sure that the power source meets the other specs shown in Section 2 5 on page 32 Is the power source OK Replace the Replace the camera power source No It is showing a A repeated flashing pattern indicates a problem with the repeated pattern of 9 camera Refer to Section 8 3 on page 216 for information slow orange flashes about using the pattern to determine the problem A camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition has No It is been detected flashing bns 7 9 Switch off the power to the camera Make the necessary continuously corrections so that the camera power will meet the requirements outlined in Section 2 5 on page 32 and then reapply power to the camera Yes It is An internal overvoltage condition has been detected Return red P the camera for repair following the RMA process see also constantly Section 8 3 on page 216 No It is flashing orange continuously Call Basler technical support for assistance The contact numbers appear on the front pages of this manual Use a voltmeter to
126. contains the shading values that will normally be used for day to day camera operation A procedure describing how to generate the values in this file appears on the next page Guidelines When Using Shading Correction When using the shading correction feature make sure to take the following guideline into account Any time you make a change to the optics or lighting or if you change the camera s exposure mode or exposure time you must generate a new set of user PRNU shading values Using out of date PRNU shading values can result in poor image quality 6 4 4 Enabling Shading Correction You can enable shading correction with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Shading Mode parameter in the DSNU and PRNU Shading Correction parameters group to enable shading correction You can enable DRNU correction only PRNU correction only or both DRNU and PRNU correction By Setting CSRs You enable shading correction by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Shading Mode CSR see page 188 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 130 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 4 5 Generating and Saving User Shading Correction Values This se
127. cross the line A in the sensor first Step 1 Calculate the magnification needed to capture the full conveyor width on a sensor line Sensor Line Length _ 40 96 mm _ 0 048 Conveyor Width 850 mm stent DUBS 0 048 p 1 20 83 p is the standard symbol for magnification and is usually expressed as a ratio Step 2 Calculate the conveyor movement necessary to move the image 10 um 10 um x 20 83 0 2083 mm Step 3 Calculate the number of encoder steps needed to move the conveyor 0 2083 mm 0 2083 mm 0 09 mm step eu SISps Since the encoder only counts in whole steps we have two options We can move the conveyor enough to generate 2 encoder steps or we can move the conveyor enough to generate 3 encoder steps In either of these cases the movement of the conveyor will not result in the image moving exactly 10 um Therefore we will need to adjust the magnification so that exactly 10 um of image Basler sprint Mono Cameras 65 Line Acquisition Modes AW00016213000 movement results And we must also consider that a change in magnification will result in a change in the amount of conveyor width that is viewed by each sensor line The calculations below look at the outcomes of our two options Option 1 Calculate the conveyor movement that will generate 2 encoder steps 2 steps x 0 09 mm step 0 18 mm Calculate the magnification needed to make 0 18 mm of conveyor movement result in 10 um movement of the image i0Oum _ 0 18
128. ction includes procedures for generating the user DSNU and PRNU shading correction values that will be stored in the user shading correction values file If you will be setting the camera to do DSNU correction only then you only need to perform the DSNU procedure If you will be setting the camera to do PRNU correction only then you only need to perform the PRNU procedure And if you will be setting the camera to do both DSNU and PRNU correction you must follow both procedures Generating and Saving User DSNU Shading Correction Values The procedure below describes how to generate user DSNU shading correction values When you generate the values they will automatically be stored in the camera s user shading value file You should be aware that the camera uses one set of DSNU values when it is operating in single line acquisition mode and a different set of values when it is operating in any one of the other line acquisition modes see Section 3 on page 41 for more information about line acquisition modes This means that If you will always be operating the camera in single line acquisition mode you should set the camera for single line acquisition mode and then follow the steps below one time If you will never be operating the camera in single line acquisition mode you should set the camera for any one of the other acquisition modes and then follow the steps below one time If you will sometimes operate the camera in single line acquisit
129. ctors One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature receptacle Two 26 pin female MDR connectors Power 12 VDC 10 Max 10 0 W 12 VDC when set for the single line acquisition mode Max 13 5 W 12 VDC when set for all other line acquisition modes Lens Adapters Sets of optical components including a helical mount or a lens mount with V Basler interface Housing Size 49 0 mm x 92 0 mm x 102 0 mm without optical components or connectors L x W x H 53 5 mm x 92 0 mm x 102 0 mm without optical components with connectors Weight 580 g without optical components 1480 g with UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount 780 g with M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount Table 4 General Specifications for the 8k Camera For information about the combinations of parameter settings for achieving the maximum specified line rates see Table 10 on page 87 Basler sprint Mono Cameras Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 1 3 Lens Adapters 1 3 1 Lens Adapters for 2k and 4k Cameras An F mount lens adapter is standard for all cameras with 2048 pixels per line 2k cameras and with 4096 pixels per line 4k cameras For 2k and 4k cameras a V mount lens adapter is also available For 2k and 4k cameras an optional M42 lens adapter and an optional C mount lens adapter are also available For cameras with 8192 pixels per line 8k cameras a helical mount or a lens mount with V Basler interface are re
130. culates the PRNU values a The camera uses the data from the 128 acquisitions to calculate an average gray value for the pixels in each line b The camera finds the pixel with the highest average gray value in the line c For each of the other pixels in the line the camera determines the additional gain that would be needed to make the pixel s average value equal to the average value for the highest pixel d The camera generates a set of PRNU values that contains the calculated gain adjustments 10 The generated set of PRNU values is automatically stored in the user shading values file in the camera s non volatile memory Existing values in the file will be overwritten 11 The user shading value file is automatically activated See Section 6 4 6 on page 136 for more information about what it means to activate a shading file Basler sprint Mono Cameras 135 Features AW00016213000 6 4 6 Activating a Shading Values File As explained in Section 6 4 on page 128 the camera contains a set of factory determined shading correction values in a file in its non volatile memory As explained in Section 6 4 5 on page 131 you can also generate a set of user shading values and save them to a separate file in the non volatile memory Assuming that you have generated user shading values you can choose to activate either the user shading values file or the factory shading values file When you activate a shading values file two
131. d and whether horizontal binning is enabled The delay also depends on whether the camera is a 2k 4k or 8k camera Each line delay can vary slightly within the stated minimum and maximum delays 2k Cameras Line Valid Delays for 4 Tap Modes 2k Cameras Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 18 us 3 31 us 10 15 us 10 28 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 23 us 3 36 us 10 50 us 10 63 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 18 us 3 31 us 10 15 us 10 28 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 16 us 3 31 us 10 11 us 10 26 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 16 us 3 81 us 10 11 us 10 26 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 16 us 3 31 us 10 11 us 10 26 us Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 40 us 9 50 us 13 17 us 13 27 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 75 us 9 85 us 13 52 us 13 63 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 40 us 9 50 us 13 17 us 13 27 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max P
132. d and data valid bits will both be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 9 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 10 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 11 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 12 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 13 Data stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 14 Data stream D6 will transmit data for pixel 15 And data stream D7 will transmit data for pixel 16 The pixel data will be at 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will both be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 17 in the line Data stream D1 will Basler sprint Mono Cameras 109 Video Data Output Modes AWO00016213000 transmit data for pixel 18 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 19 Data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 20 Data stream D4 will transmit data for pixel 21 Data stream D5 will transmit data for pixel 22 Data stream D6 will transmit data for pixel 23 And data stream D7 will transmit data for pixel 24 The pixel data will be at 8 bit depth This pattern will continue until all of the pixel data for line one has been transmitted After all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted the line valid and data valid bits both become low indicating that valid pixel data is no longer being transmitted Figure 38 on page 114 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in
133. d as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the high pixel threshold setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment Basler sprint Mono Cameras 193 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Lookup Table Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x4100 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the lookup table mode 0x00 Lookup table disabled 0x01 Lookup table enabled See Section 6 8 on page 151 for more information about the lookup table feature 194 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Lookup Table Index CSR Register Base Address 0x4108 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The r
134. ded note box on camera versions on page 165 Added new register section Low Line Rate Compensation CSR in Feature Control and Status Registers on page 174 AW00016213000 31 May 2013 Updated the mail addresses on the back of the front page Entered for 2k and 4k that a V mount lens adapter is also available Section 1 3 1 on page 6 Entered restriction for 2048 140kc and spL4096 140kc max 135 kHz line rate for ExSync operation Section 1 2 on page 2 Section 2 7 2 on page 35 Section 4 1 1 on page 69 Inserted note on cable length limitations for 80 MHz cameras in Section 2 4 1 on page 31 Inserted note on Exposure Time Control Mode parameter and camera over triggering in Section 4 1 2 on page 71 Updated formula 4 in Section 4 3 on page 77 and Section 4 3 2 on page 84 new value for camera link readout gap parameter Integrated enhanced shading correction ESC in Section 6 4 2 on page 165 Integrated shading function in Section 8 4 2 on page 221 232 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Index Numerics 2 tap video data output modes 92 4 tap video data output modes 100 8 tap video data output modes 109 A absolute values ssssusses 175 acquisition modes see line acquisition modes AO see area of interest area of interest ssss 81 122 length control and status register eode ee
135. dervoltage condition and renamed the overvoltage error as voltage error in Section 6 10 on page 155 and adjusted Section 6 11 2 on page 157 Section 8 3 on page 216 and Section 8 4 1 on page 219 Modified the camera power voltage entry in the Camera Status Inqiury register on page 170 Added the internal overvoltage condition in Section 8 3 on page 216 to the Camera Status Inqiury register on page 170 and in Section 8 4 1 on page 219 Adjusted priority levels in Section 8 3 on page 216 Removed the feedback page Basler sprint Mono Cameras 231 Revision History AW00016213000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00016212000 8 Nov 2012 New front cover image Renamed Basler Vision Technologies as Basler AG Chapier 1 Deleted section in Chapter 1 that described where to find the camera version ID number in the CCT Chapter 2 Deleted paragraph A power supply is available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative in Section 2 4 2 on page 31 Chapter 4 Adapted Section 4 1 3 on page 72 Low Line Rate Compensation to the fact that the low line rate compensation mode can now be enabled disabled Chapter 6 Adapted units to us in the exposure averaging figures in Figure 42 and Figure 43 on page 126 Integrated information in Section 6 4 5 on page 131 about the possibility to generate shading values when the AOI is set to a smaller value than the full length of the sensor Chapter 7 Ad
136. e Field Name High Pixel Threshold Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the high pixel threshold for the line stamp feature When the camera is set for 8 bit output you should set the high pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 255 OxO0FF When the camera is set for 10 bit output you should set the high pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 1023 OxOSFF When the camera is set for 12 bit output you should set the high pixel threshold within a range from 0 0x0000 to 4095 OxOFFF The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the high pixel threshold Byte 2 High byte of the high pixel threshold See Section 6 7 on page 146 for more information about the line stamp feature and the high pixel threshold Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the high pixel threshold This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the high pixel threshold This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interprete
137. e See Section 4 3 on page 77 The data sequence outlined below along with Table 36 on page 104 and Table 37 on page 105 describes what is happening at the inputs to the Camera Link transmitters in the camera 100 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes 5 2 2 1 Video Data Sequence for 4 Tap Modes When the camera is not transmitting valid data the line valid and data valid bits sent on each cycle of the pixel clock will be low Once the camera has completed an exposure there will be a delay while data is read out of the sensor When readout is complete the camera will begin to transmit pixel data On the clock cycle where valid pixel data transmission begins the line valid and data valid bits both become high Four data streams DO D1 D2 and D3 are transmitted in parallel during this clock cycle On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 1 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 2 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 3 And data stream D3 will transmit data for pixel 4 Depending on the video data output mode selected the pixel data will be at either 12 bit 10 bit or 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will both be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 5 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 6 Data stream D2 will transmit data for pixel 7 And data stream D3
138. e Acquisition Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the line acquisition mode to Vertical Binning By Setting CSRs To enable vertical binning acquisition mode write the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Line Acquisition Mode CSR see page 177 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 52 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 5 Time Delayed Line Summing Acquisition Mode When the time delayed line summing acquisition mode is active each time a line acquisition is triggered the camera will expose both line A and line B When line acquisition is complete i e exposure is finished the pixel values from line A and from line B will be handled in the following manner The pixel values for line A will be read out of the sensor and will be stored in a buffer in the camera The pixel values for line B will be read out of the sensor and they will be summed with the pixel values for line A that were stored during the previous acquisition cycle The values will be summed in the following manner The value for pixel 1 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 1 in line B The value for pixel 2 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 2 in line B The value for pixel 3 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 3 in line B And so on The summed values are transmitted out of the camera as though they were fro
139. e Exposure Time parameter to set the exposure time By Setting CSRs You select the exposure time control mode by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Exposure Time Control Mode CSR see page 178 If you select the ExSync programmable mode you will also need to set the exposure time You set the exposure time by writing a value to the Absolute Exposure Time field or to the Raw Exposure Time field of the Exposure Time CSR see page 179 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and the difference between using the absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Do not over trigger the camera because the camera might freeze and might not deliver any images any more If you over trigger the camera and you change the Exposure Time Control Mode parameter this has no effect i e the camera may still not deliver any images In such a case Undo the over triggering of the camera Afterwards you can change the Exposure Time Control Mode parameter if required Call Basler technical support for assistance Basler sprint Mono Cameras 71 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 4 1 3 Low Line Rate Compensation The low line rate compensation mode operates when low line rates are used The low line rate compensation mode can be enabled or disabled For more information see Low Line Rate Compensation CSR on page 177 By
140. e Stamp High Pixel Threshold CSR see page 193 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands 150 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 6 8 Lookup Table Features The sensor circuitry in the camera acquires pixel data at 12 bit depth However when the camera is set for an 8 bit video data output format pixel data is only output at 8 bit depth With the camera set for an 8 bit format it normally converts the 12 bit data output from the sensor to 8 bit data by simply truncating the least significant 4 bits The lookup table feature lets you create a customized table that can be used to map the 12 bit values output from the sensor to 8 bit values that will be transmitted from the camera Once you have entered values into the lookup table you can use the table to control 12 bit to 8 bit conversion rather than relying on simple truncation Note When the camera is operating in an 10 bit or 12 bit output mode and when the lookup table feature is enabled only the 8 MSBs of the transmitted data will carry information The 2 or 4 LSBs respectively will be packed with zeros The lookup table has 1025 indexed locations with an 8 bit value stored at each index like this Index Data 0 User defined 8 bit value 4 User defined 8 bit value 8 User defined 8 bit value 12 User defined 8 bit value
141. e a single line ua amp is 7 Stored data from line A Image of point for point 3 4 acquired by line A Line A pixel Image of data from this p point 3 acquisition is acquired by stored in a buf line B fer PRA Line B Object Passing Camera Point 4 Fig 23 Time Delayed Line Summing Acquisition Four Basler sprint Mono Cameras Movement NN prm Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Line Acquisition Modes Line A 57 Line Acquisition Modes AWO00016213000 Setting the Camera for Time Delayed Line Summing Acquisition Mode You can enable the time delayed line summing acquisition mode by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 use the Line Acquisition Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the line acquisition mode to Time Delayed Line Summing Line A Delayed or to Time Delayed Line Summing Line B De
142. e line contrast is last pixel in AOI 1 Line Contrast Pixel Value 4 Pixel Value i first pixel in AOI The line contrast does not include any of the 16 added stamp pixels The line contrast is based only on the pixels within the current AOI see Section 6 2 1 on page 124 Line contrast values are useful when you are adjusting the camera s focus Generally the higher the line contrast value the better the focus Stamp Pixel S16 Stamp pixel S16 is reserved for future use Currently its value will always be 0 6 7 1 Enabling and Setting the Line Stamp You can enable and set the stamp feature with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Stamp Mode parameter in the Stamp parameters group to enable the stamp You use the Stamp Low Pixel Limit parameter and the Stamp High Pixel Threshold parameter to set the low pixel limit and the high pixel threshold By Setting CSRs You enable the stamp feature by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Line Stamp Mode CSR see page 191 You set the low pixel limit by writing a value to the Low Pixel Limit field in the Line Stamp Low Pixel Limit CSR see page 192 You set the high pixel threshold by writing a value to the High Pixel Threshold field in the Lin
143. e that one of the lines is designated as line A and the other is designated as line B Horizontal Binning A feature called horizontal binning is also described in this section Horizontal binning is not a discrete line acquisition mode Rather it is a function that can be used together with any of the line acquisition modes described above For more information about horizontal binning see Section 3 8 on page 61 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 41 Line Acquisition Modes AWO00016213000 3 2 Single Line Max 70 kHz Acquisition Mode When single line acquisition mode is active the camera will only use line A Each time a line acquisition is triggered only line A will be exposed When line acquisition is complete i e exposure is finished the pixel values from the single line will be read out of the sensor and transmitted from the camera For more information about triggering line acquisition and controlling exposure see Section 4 on page 69 The maximum line acquisition rate when the camera is set for this acquisition mode is 70 kHz at full resolution If the AOI feature is used the maximum line acquisition rate may be higher See Section 6 2 on page 122 and Section 4 3 on page 77 for more information Setting the Camera for Single Line Max 70 kHz Acquisition Mode You can set the camera for single line max 70 kHz acquisition mode by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own
144. eR ROBLES aie alah hho ae DU PUES 74 4 2 1 Basics of Free Run Controlled Operation 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 74 4 2 2 Selecting a Free Run Exposure Mode Setting the Line Period and Setting the Exposure Time liliis 75 4 2 8 Guideline When Using Free Run 00000 eee 76 4 3 Maximum Allowed Line Rate Minimum Line Period 2 77 4 3 1 Max Segment AOI Pixels 1 0 0 0 0 00 eee ee 81 4 3 2 Example of Calculating the Maximum Allowed Line Rate Minimum Line Period lille 84 4 9 3 Increasing the Maximum Allowed Line Rate liliis 86 4 3 4 Camera Settings for the Maximum Specified Line Rate 86 5 Video Data Output Modes 2 0 e eee eee 89 ii Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Table of Contents bid OVENVIOW Ss 4 Li olv EIE ei Ge be ee lone oe fie UeId GOES 89 5 1 1 Setting the Video Data Output Mode 0000 eee eee 91 5 2 Video Data Output Mode Details 0 0000 cee 92 52 Tap Output Modes sevi iy um Rx DHePPREDBPRISEURDENEPIAES 92 5 2 4 1 Video Data Sequence for 2 Tap Output Modes 93 5 2 1 2 Line Valid Delays for 2 Tap Output Modes 97 5 2 2 4 Tap Output Modes ssssssseeeeee ne 100 5 2 2 4 Video Data Sequence for 4 Tap Modes 101 5 2 2 2 Line Valid Delays for 4 Tap Output Modes 106 5 2 3 8 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode sssesseeeee
145. eck the minimum On many frame grabbers the period of the ExSync signal is adjusted by changing a setting for the line rate Your line rate should not exceed 1 line period Is the ExSync period OK Check your exposure setting The exposure time must be at least 1 3 us less than the ExSync period Is the exposure OK Yes Switch on test image one Can the test image be seen Yes Replace the camera 220 Free run Correct the No gt settings Correct the setting Go to the interfacing troubleshooting chart Did you set up free run using the No gt AW00016213000 Go to the RS 644 serial communications troubleshooting chart CCT or with binary commands CCT Binary Commands Check to make sure that The exposure time is set no lower than 2 0 us page 181 Are the settings OK Switch on the test image one Can the test image be seen Yes Replace the camera The line period is set no lower than the minimum stated inthe No gt line period CSR see Correct the settings Go to the interfacing ubleshooting chart No gt tro Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 8 4 2 Poor Quality Image Troubleshooting and Support Use this chart if the image is poor quality is completely white or is completely black If you get no image at all when you attempt to capture an image with t
146. edge controlled or level controlled exposure mode Figure 39 on page 115 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in programmable exposure mode 110 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 8 Tap 8 Bit Port AO TxINO RxOutO DO Bit 0 Port A1 TXxIN1 RxOut1 DO Bit 1 Port A2 TxIN2 RxOut2 DO Bit 2 Port A3 TxINS3 RxOut3 DO Bit 3 Port A4 TxIN4 RxOut4 DO Bit 4 Port A5 TxIN6 RxOut6 DO Bit 5 Port A6 TxIN27 RxOut27 DO Bit 6 Port A7 TxIN5 RxOut5 DO Bit 7 MSB Port BO TxIN7 RxOut7 D1 Bit 0 Port B1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D1 Bit 1 Port B2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D1 Bit2 Port B3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D1 Bit 3 Port B4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D1 Bit 4 Port B5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D1 Bit 5 Port B6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D1 Bit 6 Port B7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D1 Bit 7 MSB Port CO TxIN15 RxOut15 D2 Bit 0 Port C1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D2 Bit 1 Port C2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D2 Bit 2 Port C3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D2 Bit 3 Port C4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D2 Bit 4 Port C5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D2 Bit 5 Port C6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D2 Bit 6 Port C7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D2 Bit 7 MSB LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutCIk Pixel Clock Table 21 Bit Assignments for 8 Tap Output Mode MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Basler sprint Mono Cameras Video Data Outpu
147. eed with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Camera Link Clock parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the clock speed By Setting CSRs You set the clock speed by writing a value to the Clock Speed field of the Camera Link Clock Speed CSR see page 176 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Notes Keep in mind that a change to the Camera Link clock speed is a parameter change and that parameter changes are normally lost when the camera is reset or switched off and back on To avoid this you can make changes to the camera s parameters save the changed parameters to a user set and then activate the user set This will ensure that the changed parameters are saved and are loaded into the camera at reset or power off on For more information about saving and activating sets of parameters see Section 6 14 on page 159 Lowering the clock speed from 80 MHz to 40 MHz may lower the camera s maximum allowed line rate For more information about calculating the maximum allowed line rate see Section 4 3 on page 77 Some frame grabbers are not compatible with an 80 MHz pixel clock speed Refer to the documentation for your frame gr
148. eeeee ee 109 5 2 3 1 Video Data Sequence for 8 Tap 8 Bit Mode 109 5 2 3 2 Line Valid Delays for 8 Tap Output Modes 116 6 Feallll6S 2553 50d REOR ER aa gates ERU renee T EE E 119 6 1 Gain and Offset 0 0c eens 119 ETN SGA PE ae Rene soc Ak EET RE PER ERE RR AO 119 6 1 2 ONSET Is d erba bier ates edad att Reuben aepo Bea see dons Uc 120 6 2 Area Or Interest avem ates LM SETRREELIDRIBREURRREEERE bees eee tee 122 6 2 1 Settingthe AOI 0 ee ee 124 6 3 Exposure Averaging 0 0 cette rn 125 6 3 4 Enabling and Setting Exposure Averaging eee eee eee 127 6 4 Shading Correction 0 0 cee ees 128 6 4 4 Standard Shading Correction 0 0 00 eee eee 128 6 4 2 Enhanced Shading Correction ESC Certain Models Only 128 6 4 8 Types of Shading Correction 0 0000 cee eee 129 6 4 3 Enabling Shading Correction llle 130 6 4 5 Generating and Saving User Shading Correction Values 131 6 4 6 Activating a Shading Values File llle 136 6 4 7 Copying the Factory Shading Values into the User Shading Values File 137 6 4 8 Downloading a Shading Values File to Your PC 0 138 6 4 9 Uploading a Shading Values File to Your Camera 0 5 139 6 5 Gamma Correction llle 140 6 6 Test lMages e ERU eo aes ee eee ea ae ee ee ek 142 6 6 1 Test Image One
149. efers to all line acquisition modes except the Dual Line line acquisition modes for a list of line acquisition modes see Section 3 1 on page 41 Accordingly 86 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control Dual refers to the Dual Line line acquisition modes When using the AOI feature you may be able to obtain the specified line rates for additional combinations and you may obtain higher line rates than the maximum specified line rates As an example of choosing the appropriate settings consider the spL4096 70km camera which has a maximum specified line rate of 70 kHz You can obtain the maximum specified line rate at full resolution and with horizontal binning disabled for any 4 tap video data output mode combined with 80 MHz pixel clock speed and Single or Dual line acquisition mode You can also obtain the maximum specified line rate at full resolution and with horizontal binning disabled for the 8 tap video data output mode combined with 40 or 80 MHz pixel clock speed and Single or Dual line acquisition mode The following table lists all combinations of the relevant parameters for all camera models Model Taps Camera Link Clock Line Acquisition Speed Mode s SpL2048 70km 2 taps 80 MHz Single SpL2048 140km 4 taps 80 MHz Dual 8 taps 40 MHz Dual spL4096 39km 2 taps 80 MHz Single 4 taps 40 MHz 80 MHz Single spL4096 70km 4 taps 80 MHz Single 8 taps 40 MHz 80
150. egister is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Lookup Table Index Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field selects an index in the lookup table The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the lookup table index Byte 2 High byte of the lookup table index See Section 6 8 on page 151 for more information about the lookup table feature Field Name Min Offset 0x0003 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the lookup table index The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Max Offset 0x0005 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the lookup table index The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the lookup table index The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment Basler sprint Mono Cameras 195 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Lookup Table Value CSR Register Base Addre
151. egisters these registers let you set the parameters associated with the camera s features Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains feature control and status registers in more detail lists the feature control and status registers in the camera and describes the function of each register Bulk Data Control and Status Registers these registers let you store and recall sets of values that the camera uses as a group Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains bulk data and the bulk data control and status registers in more detail It also lists the bulk data registers in the camera and describes the function of each register A special binary read write command protocol is used to read from and write to the registers in the camera Read and write commands are sent to the camera via the RS 644 serial link between the camera and the frame grabber Section 7 3 1 on page 207 describes the binary read write command protocol in detail and also provides information about using the serial link Sample code that illustrates how to use the read write commands is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 167 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 2 1 Inquiry Registers Inquiry registers contain basic information about the camera and information about the camera s current status Each inquiry register contains one or more fields and each field has an assigned address within the camera s memory space By using a binary read c
152. elay must be taken into account see Section 4 1 4 on page 73 and if applicable the low line rate compensation delay see Section 4 1 3 on page 72 For information about calculating the time needed for line readout see Section 4 3 on page 77 Formula 2 ExSync Period ExSync o O Signal L D Exposure Time 1 3 us Exposure Time 1 3ys Line Readout D Exposure Start Delay Section 4 1 4 on page 73 Plus if Applicable Low Line Rate Compensation Delay Section 4 1 3 on page 72 Fig 42 Exposure Averaging with ExSync Programmable Mode Averaging of Two Exposures as an Example Line Period _ Internal Control Signal Exposure Time 1 3 us Exposure Time i Line Readout T r T Fig 43 Exposure Averaging with Free Run Programmable Mode Averaging of Two Exposures as an Example 126 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features For more information about the ExSync programmable mode see Section 4 1 1 on page 69 For more information about the free run programmable mode see Section 4 2 1 on page 74 values receives stamp pixels The information included in the stamp pixels only When the line stamp feature is enabled only the line with the averaged pixel refers to the line with the averaged pixel values 6 3 1 Enabling and Setting Exposure Averaging You can set the exposure averaging with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from w
153. eld 0x01 is the Data field This field contains the data that must be written to the register in order to activate Test Image One see the table on page 191 Ox1D is the BCC field See Section 7 3 2 3 on page 213 for instructions on calculating a BCC Note that the use of a BCC is optional In this example we assume that a BCC is used 0x03 is the BFE field The value in the BFE field is always 0x03 212 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera 7 3 2 3 Calculating the Block Check Character The use of a block check character BCC in camera commands is optional see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 If you choose to use a BCC the BCC will be the exclusive or sum XOR sum of the bytes in the FTF field the DataLen field the Address field and the Data field of the command frame For the write command example shown in Section 7 3 2 2 on page 212 the block check character is 0x18 Let s consider how this block check character was calculated Calculating XOR sums is most easily understood when numbers are shown in their binary form so in the example calculations shown below the hexadecimal digits in our command have been converted to binary To find the XOR sum of two binary numbers you add the two digits in each column using the following rules If both digits are 0 the result is 0 If both digits are 1 the result is 0 If one of the digits is a 1 and the other is a 0 the result is 1 With all of
154. elow When these design requirements are met the image Fig 25 The Halo Effect will not have halos Position Encoder You should use a position encoder to monitor the movement of the system s conveyor You should also use the encoder output to trigger line acquisition so that a given area of an object on the conveyor is acquired when its image falls precisely on line A and precisely on line B If you do not use a position encoder haloing in the transport direction can result and the halos will vary in size Basler sprint Mono Cameras 63 Line Acquisition Modes AW00016213000 If an encoder is used but it is not set up correctly haloing in the transport direction will result In this case the halos will be constant in size Conveyor Travel The conveyor must travel in a straight line If the conveyor motion is not straight each line in the sensor will scan a different area of the object This situation will cause haloing that is perpendicular to the transport direction The halos will vary in size Sensor Perpendicularity The sensor lines in the camera must be perpendicular to the conveyor s line of travel If the sensor lines are not perpendicular to the line of travel a slightly different area of the object will fall on each line This situation will cause haloing that is perpendicular to the transport direction The halos will be constant in size Sensor Conveyor Parallelism The face of the sensor in the camera and the su
155. enabled N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models N At full resolution with horizontal binning enabled N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 35 Two Tap Modes with Programmable Exposure 96 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 5 2 1 2 Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Delays for 2 Tap Output Modes The table below shows the line valid delay see Figure 34 on page 95 and Figure 35 on page 96 when the camera is set for full resolution and a 2 tap video data output mode Note that the delay depends on the line acquisition mode setting the Camera Link clock speed and whether horizontal binning is enabled The delay also depends on whether the camera is a 2k 4k or 8k camera Each line delay can vary slightly within the stated minimum and maximum delays 2k Cameras Line Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 2k Cameras Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 18 us 3 31 us 3 73 us 3 86 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 23 us 3 36 us 3 78 us 3 91 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 18 us 3 31 us 3 73 us 3 86 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Ma
156. ensor reported that a certain pixel had a 12 bit value of 9 In this case the camera would perform an interpolation between the values stored at index 8 and index 12 in the table The result of the interpolation would then be transmitted out of the camera as an 8 bit value The value stored at index 4096 is only used for interpolation purposes when the sensor reports a 12 bit pixel value of 4093 4094 or 4095 152 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features Entering Values Into the Lookup Table You can enter 8 bit values into the lookup table with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 entering an 8 bit value at an index in the lookup table is a two step process 1 Use the Lookup Table Index parameter in the Lookup Table parameters group to select an index in the lookup table 2 Enter a value into the Lookup Table Value parameter in the Lookup Table parameters group The value will be written to the index you selected in step one Repeat steps one and two to enter values for each index in the table By Setting CSRs Entering an 8 bit value at an index in the lookup table is a two step process 1 Select an index in the lookup table by writing a value to the Index field of the Lookup Table Index CSR see page 195 2 Write an 8
157. er into a single pixel When you set an AOI with horizontal binning enabled the AOI settings are based on binned pixels rather than the actual physical pixels in the sensor lines If you are working with a camera that has sensor lines with 2048 physical pixels and you enable horizontal binning you effectively reduce the resolution to 1024 binned pixels In this case you would set the AOI as if you were working with a sensor that actually has 1024 pixels and the guidelines for working with this situation would be The AOI Starting Pixel can be set to 1 and can be increased in increments of 16 e g it can be set to 1 17 33 etc The AOI Length must be a minimum of 128 pixels can be increased in increments of 16 e g the length can be set to 128 144 160 etc The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt 1025 If you are working with a camera that has sensor lines with 4096 physical pixels and you enable horizontal binning you effectively reduce the resolution to 2048 binned pixels In this case you would set the AOI as if you were working with a sensor that actually has 2048 pixels and the guidelines for working with this situation would be The AOI Starting Pixel can be set to 1 and can be increased in increments of 16 e g it can be set to 1 17 33 etc The AOI Length must be a minimum of 128 pixels can be increased in increments of 16 e g the length can be set to 128 144 160 etc The AOI Starting Pixel AOI
158. er sprint camera make sure the file was generated using a standard Basler sprint camera 6 4 3 Types of Shading Correction There are two types of shading correction available on the camera DSNU shading correction and PRNU shading correction You can set the camera to do only DSNU correction to do only PRNU correction or to do both types of correction DSNU Shading Correction When a line scan camera with a digital sensor captures a line in complete darkness all of the pixel values in the line should be near zero and they should be equal In practice slight variations in the performance of the pixels in the sensor will cause some variation in the pixel values output from the camera when the camera is capturing lines in darkness This type of variation is know as Dark Signal Non uniformity DSNU DSNU shading correction corrects for the variations caused by DSNU PRNU Shading Correction When a line scan camera with a digital sensor captures a line with the camera viewing a uniform light colored target in bright light all of the pixel values in the line should be near their maximum gray value and they should be equal In practice slight variations in the performance of the pixels in the sensor variations in the optics and variations in the lighting will cause some variation in the pixel values output from the camera This type of variation is know as Photo Response Non uniformity PRNU The PRNU shading correction feature on the camera
159. era reset with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs A reset is the equivalent of switching off power to the camera and switching power back on With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 click on Camera in the menu at the top of the CCT window and a drop down list will appear Click on Reset Camera in the drop down list to initiate a reset By Setting CSRs You can initiate a reset by writing the appropriate value to the Reset field of the Camera Reset CSR see page 196 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Note Whenever the camera is powered on or when a camera reset is performed your PC may receive one random character on the serial interface We recommend clearing the serial input buffers in your PC after a camera power on or reset 158 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 14 Configuration Sets Non volatile A configuration set is a group of values that contains all praed ofthe parameter settings needed to control the camera ae Volatile There are three basic types of configuration sets the Memory work configuration set the factory configuration set Paget A RAM and user configuration sets UserSet02 pay lusso pw L9 UserSet03 Work Configurat
160. era with 4096 physical pixels in each line and that horizontal binning is enabled In this situation the effective resolution is 2048 and the effective pixels per segment is 1024 Assume that the AOI starting pixel is set for 929 and the length is set for 128 With these settings the AOI falls across the two sensor segments as shown in Figure 33 Segment 1 includes 96 of the binned pixels in the AOI and segment 2 includes 32 of the binned pixels in the AOI The Max Seg AOI Pixels in this situation would be 192 segment 1 contains the largest part of the AOI the number of binned AOI pixels in segment 1 is 96 and 2 x 96 192 Segment 1 Segment 2 4 wit ECE ecco ee SEE p ooon L Pixel 1 Pixel 929 Pixel 1024 L Pixel l Pixel 1056 Pixel 2048 i 1 1025 pixel within the AOI 96 Pixels 32 Pixels Fig 33 AOI Falling Across Segments Horizontal Binning Enabled Basler sprint Mono Cameras 83 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 4 3 2 Example of Calculating the Maximum Allowed Line Rate Minimum Line Period Assume that you are working with an spL4096 140km Also assume that the camera is set for the dual line Max 140 kHz line acquisition mode and 8 tap 8 bit video data output mode The AOI starting pixel is set to
161. eras equipped with sensors that have 4096 pixels per line each line has two segments as shown in Figure 31 In cameras equipped with sensors that have 8192 pixels per line each line has four segments Segment 1 Segment 2 re Pe LETTTTTTITTIITITITIIIITITIT IE TTTITITTITTITITITTTITITITTITITTITTTTITTITTTITITTITITTT ETETTTTTTTITITITTITITTITIT L Pixel 1 Pixel 2048 Pixel 2049 Pixel 4096 Fig 31 Segments in Each Line of a 4096 Pixel Sensor When you are setting up the area of interest AOI see Section 6 2 on page 122 on a camera with only one segment in each line all of the pixels included in the AOI will fall into that single segment On these cameras the Max Seg AOI Pixels is simply the number of pixels included in the AOI For example if the AOI starting pixel is set to 33 and the AOI length is set to 512 on an spL2048 70km the Max Seg AO Pixels will be 512 When you are setting up the AOI on a camera with two segments 4096 pixels in each line the pixels within the AOI may all fall into one segment Or the AOI could be positioned so that some of the pixels in the AOI fall into segment 1 and some of the pixels in the AOI fall into segment 2 The Max Seg AOI Pixels is defined as the number of AOI pixels included in the segment that contains the
162. ert by screwing in locking screw 1 2 Fine focus the lens on the object by turning the lens to employ the helical threads After having attained the optimum focus screw in locking screw 2 8 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 3 2 2 Adapting with the M58 x 0 75 V Basler Lens Mount The following example illustrates the use of the M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount connected to an assembly of further optical components including a UNIFOC 76 helical mount an M39 x 26 tpi adapter and an Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens by Schneider Kreuznach The UNIFOC 76 helical mount allows adjusting its extension over a range of 25 7 mm The assembly shown in Figure 2 as an example is adjusted for a magnification of 1 0 3 The overall length of the adjusted assemblage including the camera with connectors is ca 185 1 mm Taking account of the working distance of the Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens of ca 362 mm the overall distance between the imaged object and the camera s back with connectors is ca 547 1 mm Apo Componon 4 5 90 lens UNIFOC 76 helical mount M39 x 26 tpi adapter M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount Camera Photosensitive surface of the CMOS sensor M39 x 26 tpi V mount mount M58 mount V Basler mount 1ozotdvosog CPN 4 5 90 0018 i
163. ervoltage protection that is triggered if the voltage drops below 10 5 VDC It also has camera power overvoltage protection up to 25 VDC See Section 6 10 on page 155 for more detailed information about camera power undervoltage and overvoltage protection Applying a camera power voltage greater than 25 VDC can seriously damage the camera Making or Breaking Connections Incorrectly Can Damage the Camera Be sure that all power to your camera and to your host PC is switched off before you make or break connections to the camera Making or breaking connections when power is on can result in damage to the camera or to the frame grabber If you can t switch off the power be sure that the camera power plug is the last connector that you plug into the camera when making connections and the first connector that you unplug from the camera when breaking connections An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the Camera s 6 pin Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 6 pin connector must be a plug for 6 pins Using a plug designed for a smaller or a larger number of pins can damage the pins in the camera s 6 pin connector Basler sprint Mono Cameras 21 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 22 CAUTION Avoid Dust on the Sensor The 2k and 4k cameras are shipped with caps on the lens mounts To avoid collecting dust on the camera s sensor make sure that the cap is always in place when there is no le
164. es respectively of the Total Low Pixels The Total Low Pixels indicates the number of pixels in the captured line that are below a camera parameter called the Low Pixel Limit see Section 6 7 1 on page 150 for information about setting this parameter As an example assume that the Low Pixel Limit is set to 100 Also assume that the camera has captured a line and that 22 of the pixels in that line have a value less than 100 In this case the Total Low Pixels in the line would be 22 The total low pixels does not include any of the 16 added stamp pixels If the AOI feature is being used the total low pixels is based only on the pixels within the AOI The total high pixel and total low pixel values are useful if you want to perform automatic gain control from within your camera control software application If you find that the total low pixel values are increasing over a period of time an increase in the gain setting would be appropriate If you find Basler sprint Mono Cameras 149 Features AW00016213000 that the total high pixel values are increasing over a period of time a decrease in the gain setting would be appropriate Stamp Pixels 13 S14 and S15 Stamp pixels S13 S14 and S15 represent the least significant middle and most significant bytes respectively of the line contrast The line contrast is the sum of the difference in pixel values for each pair of neighboring pixels in the captured line In mathematical terms th
165. es output from the camera by 5 The allowed range for the absolute offset can vary depending on how the camera is configured You should check the absolute min and absolute max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The increment is 0 01 The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 1 on page 119 for more information about offset Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute offset setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute offset setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number 184 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Field Name Raw Offset Offset 0x000D Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the offset The allowed range for this value can vary depending on how the camera is configured You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The DN of offset that the camera will apply is determined as follows If
166. ess see Section 8 2 on page 215 You can check for an internal overvoltage condition by reading the value of bit 22 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register see page 170 If the bit is set to 1 an internal overvoltage condition is present Continuous fast orange General error Please contact Basler technical support 3 flashing Continuous slow orange One of the following errors is present 4 flashing No FPGA firmware is available Firmware available but error when booting the FPGA Please contact Basler technical support Repeated pattern of 6 An erroneous parameter set has been loaded 5 Table 30 Camera Status Indicators 216 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Troubleshooting and Support LED Description Priority Repeated pattern of 5 Parameter error For example a parameter is set out of range or toa 6 slow orange flashes value that is not valid Repeated pattern of 4 One of the following errors is present 7 slow orange flashes A byte time out has occurred see Section 7 3 1 1 on page 210 Invalid OpCode in a read or write command see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 Incoming data has been discarded since no BFS was included see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 Invalid BCC in a read or write command see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 Invalid address in a read or write command see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 Invalid data length in a read or write command see Section 7 3
167. et 0x000F Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gain setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0011 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gain setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Basler sprint Mono Cameras 183 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Offset CSR Note The offset can be set by writing a floating point value to the Absolute Offset field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Offset field See Section 7 2 2 1 on page 174 for an explanation of the difference between these two fields Register Base Address 0x0F00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Offset Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field directly sets the offset in DN digital numbers For example if you set this value to 5 00 you would increase the digital valu
168. f Contents vi AW00016213000 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions This section lists the camera models covered by the manual It provides the general specifications for each model and outlines the basic requirements for using the cameras This section also includes specific precautions that you should keep in mind when using the cameras We strongly recommend that you read and follow the precautions 1 1 Document Applicability This User s Manual applies to sprint mono cameras Basler sprint Mono Cameras 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 1 2 General Specifications 1 2 1 Camera Models with 2k Pixels Specification spL2048 70km spL2048 140km Sensor Size 2 lines 2048 pixels per line Sensor Type Monochrome linear CMOS Pixel Size 10 um x 10 um Camera Link 40 MHz or 80 MHz switchable Clock Speed Maximum 70 kHz 140 kHz in dual line acquisition Line Rate mode In ExSync operation max 137 kHz see note on page 35 Data Output Type Camera Link base configuration Camera Link base and medium full configuration Data Output Modes 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 4 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 8 tap 8 bit Synchronization Via external trigger signal or free run Exposure Control Edge controlled level controlled or programmable
169. files is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 201 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Downloading a Bulk Data File from the Camera to a PC You can download a bulk data file from the camera s non volatile memory to your host PC As an example assume that you have saved a configuration set to the UserSet02 file and that you want to download this file from the camera to your host PC To do so you would follow this procedure Use a binary write command to write the file name UserSet02 to the Name field of the configuration set bulk data CSR 1 Use a binary read command to read the Size field of the configuration set bulk data CSR 2 If the file contains saved data this field will tell you the file size If the file does not contain saved data this field will be O 3 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x02 Setting the value to 0x02 places the camera in read mode 4 Use a binary command to do a bulk data read from the camera The binary command must have the following characteristics OpCode 0x05 This OpCode makes the binary command a bulk data read DataLen the number of bytes to be read Max is 255 characters Address 0x281B Base address for the configuration set bulk data CSR plus the offset for the Data field Data none 5 You will receive a bulk data response frame from the camera The amount
170. for Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Mode You can enable the time delayed line averaging acquisition mode by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 use the Line Acquisition Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the line acquisition mode to Time Delayed Line Averaging Line A Delayed or to Time Delayed Line Averaging Line B Delayed as desired By Setting CSRs To enable the time delayed line averaging acquisition mode write the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Line Acquisition Mode CSR see page 177 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 60 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 8 Horizontal Binning Horizontal binning is not a discrete line acquisition mode Rather it is a function that can be used together with any of the other line acquisition modes described earlier in this section When horizontal binning is enabled adjacent pixels in a sensor line are summed and the sum is transmitted as a single pixel value For example for Line A Pixel 1 and pixel 2 in line A are summed and the sum is transmitted as a single pixel value Pixel 3 and pixel 4 in line A are summed and the sum is transmitted as a sing
171. g Values File to Your Camera Once you have downloaded a user shading values file to your PC as described on the previous page you can upload the file from your PC to a camera Using the download function together with the upload function is useful if you want to transfer a user shading values file from one camera to another camera of the same type You can upload a user shading values file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs Note that when you upload a user shading values file to your camera you will overwrite any existing values in the camera s user shading values file With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Upload button in the Shading Files parameters group to upload a user shading values file When you click the button the CCT will open a window that lets you navigate to your PC and select a file By Setting CSRs You can upload a user shading values files by writing values to the shading values bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains the bulk data CSRs and Section 7 2 3 3 on page 201 explains how to use the CSRs to upload a file Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Note The factory shading values file can be downloaded from the camera to the PC The factory shading values file can t be uploaded from the PC to the c
172. gnal see Figure 27 ExSync Period Exposure ExSync isi Signal Line Readout Fig 27 ExSync Level Controlled Mode In ExSync programmable mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the ExSyc signal The rising edge of ExSync triggers exposure and charge accumulation for a pre programmed period of time The pixel values are read out of the sensor at the end of the pre programmed period The falling edge of ExSync is irrelevant see Figure 3 4 A parameter called Exposure Time is used to set the length of the pre programmed exposure period ExSync Period ExSync Signal Exposure Time Line Readout Fig 28 ExSync Programmable Mode Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control 4 1 2 Selecting an ExSync Exposure Mode and Setting the Exposure Time You can select an ExSync exposure time control mode and set the exposure time for the ExSync programmable mode with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Exposure Time Control Mode parameter in the Exposure parameters group to select the ExSync edge controlled ExSync level controlled or ExSync programmable exposure time control mode If you select the ExSync programmable mode you can use th
173. he factor that restricts the line rate the most will determine the maximum allowed line capture rate D 78 Note When operating a camera in dual line acquisition mode see page 41 the maximum allowed line acquisition rate with the current camera settings may be lower than suggested by the formulas given below Knowing the maximum allowed line acquisition rate or the minimum line period will be particularly important when you want to operate the camera under the control of an external sync signal see page 35 To determine the maximum allowed line acquisition rate check the Line Period parameter in the Exposure parameter group of the CCT or check the absolute min field of the Line Period CSR see page 181 and use the line period value to calculate the maximum allowed line acquisition rate Check the line period value before setting the camera to operate under the control of an external sync signal The line period value will else not be indicated Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control Formula 1 calculates the maximum line rate based on the exposure time 1 Max TINGS S ce TT DDDOODBNENCT aes S Exposure time in s 0000013 x Ney Where Nexp 1 if exposure averaging is set to off Nexp 2 if the camera is set for two exposures in the exposure averaging feature Nexp 4 if the camera is set for four exposures in the exposure averaging feature For more information abo
174. he AOI starting pixel is set for 1985 and the length is set for 256 With these settings the AOI falls across the two sensor segments as shown in Figure 32 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 81 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 82 Segment 1 includes 64 of the pixels in the AOI and segment 2 includes 192 of the pixels in the AOI The Max Seg AOI Pixels in this situation would be 192 because segment 2 contains the largest part of the AOI and the number of AOI pixels in segment 2 is 192 Segment 1 Segment 2 4 gt lt gt FCCC eC pe eee Pee Soccer L Pixel 1 Pixel 1985 Pixel 2048 L Pixel 2049 Pixel 2240 i Pixel 4096 l x 64 Pixels 192 Pixels pixel within the AOI Fig 32 AOI Falling Across Segments Note If you have set an AOI to extend over two adjacent sensor segments and to use each sensor segment only partially the Max Seg AOI Pixels will be smallest when the AOI is evenly divided across the two segments i e each segment contains the same number of AOI pixels Positioning the AOI so that it is evenly divided across the two segments will yield the best results from formula two If you have set an AOI to extend over three or four adjacent sensor segments at least one complete segment will
175. he Address field in little endian This field indicates the CSR address from which the data bytes will be read The little endian values of 0x00 0x18 in the address field translate to an address of 0x1800 If you check the table on page 191 you will find that 0x1800 is the address for the Status field of the Test Image Mode CSR 0x15 is the BCC field See Section 7 3 2 3 on page 213 for instructions on calculating a BCC Note that the use of a BCC is optional In this example we assume that a BCC is used 0x03 is the BFE The value in the BFE field is always 0x03 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 211 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 3 2 2 Write Command This section includes a text description the hex digits included in a command message used to write a value of 0x01 to the Mode field of the Test Image Mode CSR see page 191 The intent of this section is to give you a basic understanding of the elements included in a write command Sample code that illustrates how to send a write command is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214 The hex digits included in the write command are 0x01 0x04 0x01 0x01 0x18 0x01 0x1D 0x03 0x01 is the BFS field The value in the BFS field is always 0x01 0x04 is the FTF field The hex value of 0x04 in the FTF field converts to a binary value of 0b00000100 Bits 7 through 3 of the binary value indicate the OpCode As shown in the OpCode table on page 208 an OpCode value of
176. he camera is configured You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The integer value represents a multiplier and the actual exposure time is equal to the value in this field times 0 1 us For example if the value in this field is set to 1200 then Exposure Time 1200 x 0 1 us Exposure Time 120 us The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 Mid byte of the raw value Byte 3 High byte of the raw value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Basler sprint Mono Cameras 179 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x0011 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw exposure time setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related fields are set The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 Mid byte of the min value Byte 3 High byte of the min value Byte 4 Always 0 not used Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0015 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw exposure time setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related fields are set The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 Mid byte of the max value Byte 3 High
177. he enhanced shading correction has the same working principle as the standard shading correction The enhanced shading correction can correct variations down to 25 of the maximum intensity light variations that go down to 25 of the maximum intensity can be corrected maximum correction factor 4 0 As a consequence of the increased range of correction the resolution of the shading correction parameter is decreased Camera models with enhanced shading correction include the letters ESC in their name e g spL4096 39kmESC The effect of ESC is schematically shown in the following figure E 01 ee eee m Pixel Values s 100 eI After ESC 2 75 _ D Max 75 m ao 5 Pixel Values 25 Before ESC 25 Se wwP wonvPPrrrrrrrPrr 07nwwrrrrrrwrrrPPnOnPPPnB PBwonw 0 0 SMt0 SBmn 0 ee TI TESI Fig 44 Pixel Value Adjustment Example Due to Enhanced Shading Correction ESC 128 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features The file format of the user shading value file for a Basler sprint ESC camera is different from the file format for a standard Basler sprint camera Accordingly a file generated by a Basler sprint ESC camera can not be used in a standard Basler sprint camera and vice versa Therefore note Note When uploading a user shading value file to a Basler sprint ESC camera make sure the file was generated using a Basler sprint ESC camera to a standard Basl
178. he frame grabber use the chart that appears in Section 8 4 1 on page 219 Use the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT to set the camera for test image one Capture several images and carefully check the pixel values in each image Most frame grabbers include software tools that allow you to see the individual values of each pixel in the image and histograms that display distributions of the pixel values in the image The pixel values in your captured test image should be exactly as described in Section 6 6 on page 142 Also if you capture several test images the pixel values Go to the interfacing troubleshooting should be the same in all of the captured test images chart Are the test images OK Use the CCT to activate the factory configuration set and then capture a few normal images Is the problem still present Yes Images are too bright or too dark Make sure that the lens cap has been removed Check the lens aperture If the images are too dark try opening the aperture Try closing the aperture if they are too bright Check the exposure time If the images are too dark try increasing the exposure Try decreasing the exposure if they are too bright Check your light source If the images are too dark try increasing your light intensity Try decreasing the intensity if they are too bright Check your gain setting If the images are too dark try increasing the gain Try decreasing the gain if t
179. he line period Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute line period setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related features are set The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute line period setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way that any related features are set The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Line Period Offset 0x000D Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the line period The allowed range for this value can vary depending on the camera model and how the camera is configured You should check the raw min and raw max fields of this register to determine the allowed range with the current configuration The integer value represents a multiplier and the line period is equal to the value in this field times 0 1 us For example if the value in this field is set to 1500 then Line Period 1500 x 0 1 us Exposure Time 150 us The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 Mid byte of the raw value
180. hey are too bright Check whether a parameter error has occurred If the images are black make sure all parameters are set within the valid ranges and to valid values Has the problem been corrected Yes No Exit this chart One of the camera s settings was significantly misadjusted Review the camera manual to make sure that you are setting the camera correctly Other image problems Images look noisy Make sure that you are using a DC light source Using an AC light source can make images appear noisy Make sure that the camera has proper ventilation If the camera becomes extremely hot it may produce noisy images Check the exposure time If you use an extremely long exposure time the images can become noisy Check your gain setting Using a very high gain setting can cause noisy images Examine the objects that you are imaging Objects with characteristics such as changing surface texture or reflectance will produce images that appear noisy Is the shading correction using correct parameters Has the problem been corrected Yes No Exit this chart Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the front pages of this manual Before you call for support be sure to make note of the camera settings and the frame grabber settings you are using You should also have a captured live image and a captured test image available Basler technical support will frequently request
181. ile by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the File Name Select parameter in the Configuration Set Files parameters group to select a user set file or the factory set file and use the Download button to download the selected file By Setting CSRs You can download a user set file or the factory set file by writing values to the configuration set bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains the bulk data CSRs and Section 7 2 3 3 on page 201 explains how to use the CSRs to download a file Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Mono Cameras 163 Features AW00016213000 6 14 5 Uploading Configuration Set Files to Your Camera Once you have downloaded user configuration set files to your PC as described on the previous page you can upload the files from your PC to a camera Using the download function together with the upload function is useful if you want to transfer a user set file from one camera to another camera of the same type You can upload a user set file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs Note that when you upload a user set file to your
182. ing and make sure that the temperature does not exceed 50 C Keep in mind that the camera will gradually become warmer during the first 1 5 hours of operation After 1 5 hours the housing temperature should stabilize and no longer increase If your camera is mounted on a substantial metal component in your system this may provide sufficient heat dissipation Use of a fan to provide air flow over the camera is an extremely efficient method of heat dissipation Using a fan to provide air flow over the camera s heat sinks provides the best heat dissipation The camera includes an overtemperature protection function that will switch off the imaging sensor circuitry if the temperature of the sensor is too high See Section 6 11 1 on page 156 for more information The camera also includes an internal temperature sensor that lets you monitor the temperature of the imaging sensor See Section 6 9 on page 154 for more information Note Keeping the camera cool will give you the best signal to noise ratio When the camera operates hot the signal to noise ratio is reduced 20 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 7 Precautions CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION Applying Incorrect Camera Power Can Damage the Camera The nominal voltage for the camera power is 12 VDC 10 We do not recommend applying a voltage less than 10 8 VDC or greater than 13 2 VDC The camera has camera power und
183. inquiry registers With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Sensor Temperature parameter in the Camera Information parameters group to check the temperature of the imaging sensor By Reading Inquiry Registers You check the temperature of the imaging sensor by reading the Temperature field of the Imaging Sensor Temperature Inquiry Register see page 173 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of Inquiry Registers and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Note If the temperature of the imaging sensor rises above 75 C an overtemperature error will be declared See Section 6 11 1 on page 156 for more information about overtemperature error detection 154 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 10 Camera Power Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection The camera s nominal camera power voltage is 12 VDC 10 We do not recommend applying less than 10 8 VDC or greater than 13 2 VDC The camera has camera power undervoltage protection If the camera power voltage is less than but close to 9 8 VDC a camera power voltage error may be detected and if the voltage decreases further the camera s internal power regulator will automatically disconnect and the camera will no longer operate When the camera power voltage is returned to the normal range the camera will return to normal operation The camera also has camera power overvoltage p
184. ion Set UserSet04 The work configuration set contains the camera s ee current parameter settings and thus determines the Factory Set camera s performance If you use the CCT to change the camera settings or if you change settings by writing Fig 51 Configuration Sets to the camera s registers you are making changes to the work configuration set The work configuration set resides in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The work configuration set is usually just called the work set for short Factory Configuration Set When a camera is manufactured a test setup is performed on the camera and an optimized configuration is determined The factory configuration set contains the camera s factory optimized parameter settings The factory set is saved in a permanent file in the camera s non volatile memory The factory set can not be altered by the user and since it is stored in non volatile memory it is not lost when the camera is reset or switched off The factory configuration set is usually just called the factory set for short and is named FactorySet User Configuration Sets As mentioned above the work configuration set resides in the camera s volatile memory and the parameters settings in the work set are lost if the camera is reset or is switched off The camera can save the parameter settings from the current work set to a file in the camera s n
185. ion mode and other times operate the camera in one of the other modes you should first set the camera for single line acquisition mode and follow the steps below You should then set the camera for any one of the other acquisition modes and you should go through the steps a second time The camera s user shading values file has one area where it holds the DSNU values it uses for single line mode and another area where it stores the values for all of the other modes To generate a set of user DSNU values Set the camera for the desired line acquisition mode 2 Make sure the area of interest parameters are set so that the camera will use the full length of the sensor see Section 6 2 on page 122 It is possible to generate shading values when the AOI is set to a smaller value than the full length of the sensor In this case only the shading values inside the AOI will be calculated but the full shading file will be written Values that are outside of the current AOI will be copied from the previously activated shading file 3 Ensure that the camera will be capturing lines in complete darkness by covering the camera lens closing the iris in the lens or darkening the room 4 Begin acquiring lines either by generating an ExSync signal to trigger line acquisition or by setting the camera for a free run exposure time control mode 5 Signal the camera to generate a set of DSNU values a You can start the generation of a set of DSNU val
186. ion to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Line Acquisition Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the line acquisition mode to Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line A First or to Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line B First By Setting CSRs You set the line acquisition mode to two line by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Line Acquisition Mode CSR see page 177 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 50 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 4 Vertical Binning Acquisition Mode When the vertical binning acquisition mode is active each time a line acquisition is triggered the camera will expose both line A and line B When acquisition is complete i e exposure is finished the pixel values from line A will be added to the pixel values from B in the following manner The value for pixel 1 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 1 in line B The value for pixel 2 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 2 in line B The value for pixel 3 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 3 in line B And so on The summed values for each pair of pixels will be transmitted from the camera as though they were from a single pixel Vertical binning can be useful if you are capturing images in low light conditions and
187. it 10 bit or 8 bit depth On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will both be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 3 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 4 On the next cycle of the pixel clock the line valid and data valid bits will be high On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 5 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 6 This pattern will continue until all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted After all of the pixel data for the line has been transmitted the line valid and data valid bits both become low indicating that valid pixel data is no longer being transmitted Figure 34 on page 95 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in edge controlled or level controlled exposure mode Figure 35 on page 96 shows the data sequence when the camera is operating in programmable exposure mode Basler sprint Mono Cameras 93 Video Data Output Modes AW00016213000 MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 2 Tap 12 Bit 2 Tap 10 Bit 2 Tap 8 Bit Port AO TxINO RxOutO DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 DO Bit 0 Port A1 TxIN1 RxOut1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 DO Bit 1 Port A2 TxIN2 RxOut2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 DO Bit 2 Port A3 TxIN3 RxOut3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 DO Bit 3 Port A4 TxIN4 RxOut4 DO Bit 4 DO
188. ite stopped This procedure will upload the data in the file to the camera If you want to upload a user shading value bulk data file from a PC to a camera you would use a similar procedure but you would use the shading value bulk data CSR instead Sample code that illustrates how to upload a bulk data file is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214 Note When you upload a bulk data file from the PC to the camera it will overwrite any existing data in the camera file with the same name For example if you upload a configuration set file called UsetSet02 from a PC to a camera it will overwrite the existing contents of the UserSet2 file in the camera You can download the factory configuration set file from the camera to the PC but you can t upload the factory configuration set from the PC to the camera The factory configuration set in the camera is protected and can t be overwritten Basler sprint Mono Cameras 203 Configuring the Camera 7 2 3 4 AW00016213000 Bulk Data Control and Status Register Details Configuration Set CSR See Section 7 2 3 1 on page 198 for information about using the configuration set bulk data control register Register Base Address 0x2800 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The regi
189. ithin your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Exposure Averaging control to set the number of consecutive line exposures used for exposure averaging By Setting CSRs You set the number of exposures used for averaging by writing a value to the Value field of the Exposure Averaging CSR see page 188 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Basler sprint Mono Cameras 127 Features AW00016213000 6 4 Shading Correction 6 4 4 Standard Shading Correction In theory when a digital camera captures an image of a uniform object the pixel values output from the camera should be uniform In practice however variations in optics and lighting and small variations in the sensor s performance can cause the camera output to be non uniform even when it is capturing images of a uniform object The camera is equipped with a shading correction feature that allows it to correct the captured image for variations caused by optics lighting and sensor variations The standard shading correction feature can correct variations down to 66 of the maximum intensity i e light variations that go down to 66 of the maximum intensity can be corrected maximum correction factor 1 5 6 4 2 Enhanced Shading Correction ESC Certain Models Only T
190. iting an integer to this field sets the line stamp mode 0x00 Line stamp off 0x01 Line stamp on See Section 6 7 on page 146 for more information about the line stamp feature Basler sprint Mono Cameras 191 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Line Stamp Low Pixel Limit CSR Register Base Address 0x2B20 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Low Pixel Limit Offset 0x0001 Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the low pixel limit for the line stamp feature When the camera is set for 8 bit output you should set the low pixel limit within a range from 0 0x0000 to 255 Ox00FF When the camera is set for 10 bit output you should set the low pixel limit within a range from 0 0x0000 to 1023 Ox03FF When the camera is set for 12 bit output you should set the low pixel limit within a range from 0 0x0000 to 4095 OxOFFF The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the low pixel limit Byte 2 High byte of the low pixel limit See Section 6 7 on page 146 for more information about the line stamp feature and the low pixel limit
191. ixel Image of data from this point 1 acquisition is acquired by stored in a buf line B fer E Line B Object Passing Camera Movement 9 Fig 21 Time Delayed Line Summing Acquisition Two Basler sprint Mono Cameras Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Wer Point 1 Line Acquisition Modes Line A 55 Line Acquisition Modes Acquisition 3 Pixel data is summed and transmitted from the camera as if it were a single line i AW00016213000 r Stored data from line A for point 2 Image of point 2 line B acquired by Image of point 3 acquired by line A Line A pixel data from this acquisition is stored in a buf fer Line A Line B Object Passing Camera Movement J Fig 22 Time Delayed Line Summing Acquisition Three 56 Point 1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Acquisition 4 Pixel data is summed and transmitted from the camera as if it wer
192. k Configuration SpL2048 70km MDR Conn 1 only Base SpL2048 140km spL4096 39km MDR Conn 1 and MDR Conn 2 Medium full spL4096 70km spL4096 140km SpL8192 70km Table 5 MDR Connectors by Camera Model Camera Link medium full T MDR Conn 2 6 Pin Micro miniature J4 Receptacle 12 VDC Q LED ee 26 Pin Female MDR Connector only present on Camera Link medium full configuration cameras MDR Conn 1 9 Camera Link base J 1 J 26 Pin Female MDR Connector present on all cameras Fig 11 Connectors and LED 2k and 4k cameras 8k cameras are analogous 26 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Physical Interface 2 2 Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering 2 2 1 Pin Assignments for the MDR Connectors The pin assignments for MDR Connector 1 see Figure 11 on page 26 are shown in Table 6 The pin assignments for MDR connector 2 are shown in Table 7 Pin Number Signal Name Direction Level Function 1 13 14 261 Gnd Input Ground Ground for the inner shield of the cable 2 X0 Output Camera Link Data from the Camera Link transmitter 15 X0 Eves 3 X1 Output Camera Link Data from the Camera Link transmitter 16 X1 EDS 4 X2 Output Camera Link Data from the Camera Link transmitter 17 X2 LVDS
193. l be smallest when the AOI is evenly divided across the two segments i e each segment contains the same number of AOI pixels If the AOI covers two complete segments or more the Max Seg AOI Pixels will be 2048 and can not be decreased by repositioning the AOI If you find that formula three pixel processing rate is the most restrictive factor you can decrease the AOI length Decreasing the AOI length will usually increase the maximum line rate yielded by formula three Formula four transmission time will not normally be a restricting factor But if you are using a 2 tap or a 4 tap video data output mode you may find that the transmission time is restricting the line rate In this situation you may be able to switch to an output mode that uses a larger number of taps Using a larger number of taps will reduce the time it takes to transmit the pixel data and will increase the maximum line rate yielded by formula four You may be able to decrease the transmission time by selecting a higher Camera Link clock speed if available 4 3 4 Camera Settings for the Maximum Specified Line Rate You can obtain the camera s maximum specified line rate by combining the appropriate settings for the following parameters number of taps of the video data output mode Camera Link clock speed line acquisition mode The combinations listed in this section apply to full resolution and horizontal binning disabled The designation Single in this section r
194. layed as desired By Setting CSRs To enable the time delayed line summing acquisition mode write the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Line Acquisition Mode CSR see page 177 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 58 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 6 Line Averaging Acquisition Mode When the line averaging acquisition mode is active each time a line acquisition is triggered the camera will expose both line A and line B When acquisition is complete i e exposure is finished the pixel values from line A and from B will be averaged in the following manner The value for pixel 1 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 1 in line B and the total will be divided by 2 and rounded up if necessary The value for pixel 2 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 2 in line B and the total will be divided by 2 and rounded up if necessary The value for pixel 3 in line A will be added to the value for pixel 3 in line B and the total will be divided by 2 and rounded up if necessary And so on The averaged values will then be transmitted from the camera as though they were from a single line The pixels in each line of the sensor are 10 um H x 10 um V So when you are using line averaging you are getting the same aspect ratio as a single line sensor that is 10 um H x 20 um V Setting the Camera fo
195. ld be aware that two cycles of the ExSync signal are required to acquire and transmit the two lines in the sensor Assuming that you have the camera set for the Line A First mode the first cycle of the ExSync signal will trigger the start of image acquisition i e exposure on BOTH lines in the sensor The exposure time you are using will apply to BOTH lines time the start of pixel data readout for both lines time the start of transmission of line A pixel data The second cycle of the ExSync signal will be used to time the start of transmission of line B pixel data The time line shown in Figure 14 illustrates this situation when an ExSync signal is used to trigger line acquisition the camera is set for programmable exposure and the camera is set for Dual Line Max 140 kHz Line A First The figure shows what occurs through two cycles of the ExSync signal For more information about triggering line acquisition and controlling exposure see Section 4 on page 69 Programmed Exposure i Time Line A and Line B i Acquired Line A and Line B are Read Out Line A Data i Line B Data Transmitted f Transmitted to the Grabber i to the Grabber Line B Data Stored in Buffer Time From Rise of ExSync to Start of Data Transmission Will Be Equal Fig 14 Dual Line Acquisition with ExSync Programmable Exposure and Line A First To better understand the concept of dual line acquisition consider the example that is illu
196. le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique Life Support Applications These products are not designed for use in life support appliances devices or systems where malfunction of these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury Basler customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Basler for any damages resulting from such improper use or sale Warranty Note Do not open the housing of the camera The warranty becomes void if the housing is opened All material in this publication is subject to change without notice and is copyright Basler AG Contacting Basler Support Worldwide Europe Basler AG An der Strusbek 60 62 22926 Ahrensburg Germany Tel 49 4102 463 515 Fax 49 4102 463 599 support europe baslerweb com Americas Basler Inc 855 Springdale Drive Suite 203 Exton PA 19341 U S A Tel 1 610 280 0171 Fax 1 610 280 7608 support usa baslerweb com Asia Basler Asia Pte Ltd 8 Boon Lay Way 03 03 Tradehub 21 Singapore 609964 Tel 65 6425 0472 Fax 65 6425 0473 support asia baslerweb com www baslerweb com AW00016213000 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 1 1 Document Applicability llle RII 1 1 2 General Specifications llle 2 1 21 Camera Models with 2k Pixels
197. le accomplishes two things The values from the activated file are immediately copied into the work set in the camera s volatile memory The camera will now actively use the configuration values that were copied into the work set A link is created between the activated file and the camera s volatile memory The values in the activated file will automatically be copied into the work set whenever the camera is powered up or reset As an example assume that you have saved a configuration set to the UserSet07 file and that you want to activate this file To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserSet01 to the Name field of the configu ration set bulk data CSR see page 204 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x05 Setting the value to 0x05 initiates an activate function This procedure would find the UserSet0f file in the non volatile memory and would copy the values in the file into the camera s volatile memory It would also create a link to the file so that the values in the file would be loaded into volatile memory after a reset or a power up If you want to activate the factory set you would following a similar procedure but use FactorySet as the file name Sample code that illustrates how to activate a saved bulk data file is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214 Basler sprint Mono
198. le 9 on page 73 Updated the formulas and descriptions throughout Section 4 3 on page 77 to include information relevant to the new 2k and 4k camera models Continued on the next page Basler sprint Mono Cameras 227 Revision History AW00016213000 Doc ID Number Date Changes Continued from the previous page Added Table 11 on page 90 which describes the video data output modes available on each model Updated Figure 34 on page 95 through Figure 39 on page 115 to reflect the sensor sizes available on the new camera models Updated Table 13 on page 97 Table 15 on page 98 and Table 19 on page 107 to reflect minor timing changes made with the new camera models Updated Section 6 1 1 on page 119 to reflect a change in the minimum allowed gain setting Updated Section 6 2 on page 122 to reflect the sensor sizes available in the new camera models Added Section 6 8 on page 151 and the register information on page 194 page 195 and page 196 to describe the new lookup table feature 228 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00016206000 12 Sep 2008 Integrated the 8k camera models Updated contact addresses and phone numbers Updated the camera version ID number in Section 1 1 on page 1 Replaced input power by camera power in Section 1 7 on page 21 Section 2 on page 25 Section 6 on page 119 Sectio
199. le name refers to an already existing bulk data file this field will contain the file size in bytes Otherwise the field contains zeros Field Name Data Offset 0x001B Size Variable Type Read Write Description Byte sized register that is used to sequentially write to or read from a bulk data file Basler sprint Mono Cameras 205 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 3 Using Binary Read Write Commands As explained in Section 7 2 on page 167 each camera has control and status registers with one or more fields that are used to set the values for parameters associated with a camera feature For example the gain control and status register has two fields that can be used to set the camera s gain see Section 6 1 on page 119 By writing values to fields in the control registers you configure the camera and control how it operates By reading values from fields in the control registers you can determine how the camera is currently configured Each camera also has inquiry registers with fields that contain basic information such as the camera s serial number and software version numbers By reading values in the inquiry register fields you can determine some basic information about the camera A binary read write command protocol has been developed for use with the camera You can read the data in a register field by sending a binary read command to the camera For example you can use a read command to determine the curre
200. le pixel value And so on And for Line B Pixel 1 and pixel 2 in line B are summed and the sum is transmitted as a single pixel value Pixel 3 and pixel 4 in line B are summed and the sum is transmitted as a single pixel value And so on Note that when horizontal binning is used with single line acquisition mode only Line A is used and only the binned pixels from Line A are transmitted With horizontal binning is enabled each pair of binned pixels effectively becomes a single pixel This means that with binning enabled the effective resolution of a sensor is halved For cameras with 8192 pixels in each sensor line the effective resolution becomes 4096 for cameras with 4096 pixels in each sensor line the effective resolution becomes 2048 and for cameras with 2048 pixels in each sensor line the effective resolution becomes 1024 This reduced resolution has an impact on the way that the camera s area of interest feature is set For more information about the AOI feature see Section 6 2 on page 122 Figure 24 illustrates horizontal binning Pixels Summed and Transmitted as i a Single Value Fig 24 Horizontal Binning The physical pixels in each line of the sensor are 10 um H x 10 um V With horizontal binning enabled the effective pixel size becomes 20 um H x 10 uim V Some users may find the effective 20 um x 10 um pixel size to be objectionable because the effective pixel is no longer square Note that if you use
201. length setting This field is updated to reflect limitations caused by the way any related features are set The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0007 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the AOI length setting The 2 bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the increment Byte 2 High byte of the increment Basler sprint Mono Cameras 187 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 Exposure Averaging Control Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x3a00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Value Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the number of consecutive exposures used for averaging 0x01 Off no exposure averaging is performed 0x02 Two exposures used for averaging 0x04 Four exposures used for averaging See Section 6 3 on page 125 for a description of the exposure averaging feature Shading Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x2000 Field Name
202. low but close to 9 8 VDC is applied to the camera a camera power undervoltage condition may be detected Similarly if a camera power voltage between 14 and 18 VDC is applied to the camera a camera power overvoltage condition will be detected The LED on the back of the camera will begin to flash red When the camera power voltage is returned to its normal range the error condition will clear and the LED will stop flashing Note that if the camera power voltage rises above 18 VDC the camera s internal power will switch off as described in Section 6 10 on page 155 You can check to see if the camera has detected a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read commands from within your own application to read the camera s inquiry registers With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Voltage Error parameter in the Camera Information parameters group to determine if a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition has been detected If the value is 1 a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition is present By Reading Inquiry Registers You check for an undervoltage or overvoltage condition by reading the value of bit 6 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register see page 170 If the bit is set to 1 a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition is present See Section 7 2 1 on page 168 for an ex
203. m a single captured line In essence this process acquires each line on the object twice sums the captured data and reports the result as if it was from a single acquisition Line summing can be useful if you want to decrease the noise level in the pixel values output from the camera Using line summing will result in an increase of approximately 3 dB in the signal to noise ratio To better understand the concept of time delayed line summing consider the example that is illustrated in Figure 20 through Figure 23 The example looks at four contiguous points on an object moving past the camera Each point represents the area on the object that will be captured by one line in the sensor when a line acquisition is performed As you look at the figures notice that when each acquisition is performed line A will capture one point on the object and line B will capture a different point on the object Line A Delayed or Line B Delayed When you use time delayed line summing you have two choices time delayed line summing with line A delayed or time delayed line summing with line B delayed You should use time delayed line summing with line A delayed if the image of the object you are capturing will pass line A first the object being imaged will pass line B fist You should use time delayed line summing with line B delayed if the image of the object you are capturing will pass line B first the object being imaged will pass line A fist
204. mage Two on a Camera with 4096 Pixels Per Line Mm 4 4 mnm 4 Fig 48 Test Image Two Note When the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode the pixel values in test image one range from 0 to 255 as described above If the camera is set for 10 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 1023 If the camera is set for 12 bit output the pixel values will range from 0 to 4095 144 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 6 3 Test Image Three Uniform Black In test image three all pixels will always have a value of 0 regardless of the output mode Test image three should always appear as a uniform black image Test image three is useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above 6 6 4 Test Image Four Uniform Gray In test image four all pixels will have a value of 127 when the camera is set for an 8 bit output mode When the camera is set a 10 bit output mode all pixels will have a value of 511 And when the camera is set for a 12 bit output mode all pixels will have a value of 2047 Test image four should appear as a uniform gray image Test image four is useful for checking the integrity of the data transmitted by the camera If you capture lines and examine the pixel values in the captured lines the values should be exactly as described above Basler sprint M
205. memory are not lost at reset or power off There are four files available for holding a saved user configuration set UserSet0 1 UserSet02 UserSet03 and UserSet04 Saved configuration sets are commonly referred to as user configuration sets or user sets Note For the 8k camera only two user sets UserSet01 and UserSet02 are available Saving a User Configuration Set You can save the current work set to one of the files in the non volatile memory by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the File Name Select parameter and the Copy button in the User Set Files parameters group Clicking the copy button will copy the work set settings to the selected user set file in the non volatile memory By Setting CSRs You can save the current work set settings to a file in the non volatile memory by writing values to the bulk data CSR for configuration sets Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains the bulk data CSRs and explains how to use the CSRs to save the work set to a user set file Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Mono Cameras 161 Features AW00016213000 6 14 2 Activating a User Set File or the Factory Set File As explained on page 159 a factory configuration set containing an op
206. mera Link based cameras No Exit this chart Use an ohm meter to check each wire to see of it is broken or shorted to any of the other wires in the cable After you checked the cables is the problem still present Yes only one piece of hardware at a time and retry the system after each substitution If extra hardware is available try to locate the problem by substitution Substitute N Exit this o chart After you finished making substitutions is the problem still present Check the camera file that you are using with your frame grabber see the Installation and Setup Guide for Camera Link Cameras Make sure that it is the correct file for your Basler sprint model and current video data output mode Be aware that sometimes different camera files must be used depending on which of the camera s features you have enabled No Exit this Camera files should be available on your frame grabber supplier s website chart After you checked the camera file is the problem still present Yes Contact Basler technical support The contact numbers appear on the front pages of this manual Before you call for support be sure to make note of the camera settings and the frame grabber settings you are using You should also have a captured live image and a captured test image available Basler technical support will frequently request that you e mail copies of these captured images 222 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW0001621300
207. mera Link clock speed the maximum line rate for the spL2048 140km camera in a dual line acquisition mode will be less than 140 kHz The camera will however reach the maximum specified line rate of 140 kHz in any 8 tap video data output mode at 40 MHz and in the 4 tap video data output mode at 80 MHz For more information about the camera settings to obtain the maximum specified line rates of the cameras see Section 4 3 4 on page 86 90 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes 5 1 1 Setting the Video Data Output Mode You can set the video data output mode with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Video Data Output Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the output mode By Setting CSRs You select the video data output mode by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Video Data Output Mode CSR see page 183 See Section 7 2 2 on page 174 for an explanation of CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Basler sprint Mono Cameras 91 Video Data Output Modes AW00016213000 5 2 Video Data Output Mode Details Note The following values for line valid and frame valid delays apply to line acquisitions at full resolution If a shorter
208. mera generates a set of DSNU shading values that contains the calculated offsets 8 The generated set of DSNU values is automatically saved in the user shading values file in the camera s non volatile memory Existing values in the file will be overwritten a d 132 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 9 The user shading value file is automatically activated See Section 6 4 6 on page 136 for more information about what it means to activate a shading file Generating and Saving User PRNU Shading Correction Values The procedure below describes how to generate user PRNU shading correction values When you generate the values they will automatically be stored in the camera s user shading value file You should be aware that the camera uses one set of PRNU values when it is operating in single line acquisition mode and a different set of values when it is operating in any one of the other line acquisition modes see Section 3 on page 41 for more information about line acquisition modes This means that If you will always be operating the camera in single line acquisition mode you should set the camera for single line acquisition mode and then follow the steps below one time If you will never be operating the camera in single line acquisition mode you should set the camera for any one of the other acquisition modes and then follow the steps below one time If you will sometimes operate the camera in single li
209. mm 9 990 1 0 056 HP B 1 17 86 Calculate the width of conveyor that will be viewed by each sensor line at this magnification 40 96 mm x 17 86 731 55 mm Option 2 Calculate the conveyor movement that will generate 3 encoder steps 3 steps x 0 09 mm step 0 27 mm Calculate the magnification needed to make 0 27 mm of conveyor movement result in 10 um movement of the image i0um _ 0 27 mm rd Calculate the width of conveyor that will be viewed by each sensor line at this magnification 40 96 mm x 27 03 1102 92 mm 66 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes If you choose to use 2 encoder steps to move the image 10 um you will require a 1 17 86 magnification and at this magnification the field of view of each sensor line will be 731 55 mm If you choose to use 3 encoder steps to move the image 10 um you will require a magnification of 1 27 03 and at this magnification the field of view of each sensor line will be 1102 92 mm Since our conveyor is 850 mm wide and since it is usually more acceptable to have a field of view slightly larger than the conveyor assume that we choose option 2 Step 4 Select an appropriate lens and determine the mounting distance for your camera You can contact Basler technical support if you need help with this procedure Step 5 Make sure that the line acquisition mode is set correctly In this case it would be set to delayed line summing line A delayed This
210. mum specified line rate of the camera see Section 4 3 4 on page 86 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 77 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 D Note Contrary to expectation the maximum specified line rate may sometimes not be reached when using maximum tap and Camera Link clock speed settings or when e g using a dual line acquisition mode see page 41 or horizontal binning see page 61 This is due to data sorting within the camera You will nonetheless be able to reach the maximum specified line rate by using fewer taps and or decreasing the Camera Link clock speed For example in 8 tap video data output mode at 80 MHz Camera Link clock speed the maximum line rate for the spL2048 140km camera in a dual line acquisition mode will be less than 140 kHz The camera will however reach the maximum line rate of 140 kHz in 8 tap video data output mode at 40 MHz or 4 tap video data output mode at 80 MHz To reach the maximum specified line rate make sure that the product of the number of taps and Camera Link clock speed is larger than the product of the number of pixels per AOI and maximum specified line rate but not substantially so To determine the maximum allowed line acquisition rate with your current camera settings you must calculate a result for the four formulas that appear below The formula that returns the lowest value will determine the maximum allowed line rate with the current settings In other words t
211. n 3 8 on page 61 calculating the Max Segment AOI Pixels is done a bit differently With horizontal binning enabled the resolution of the sensor the segment size the AOI Starting Pixel and the AOI Length are all based on binned pixels For example with horizontal binning enabled on a camera that has 2048 physical pixels in each line the effective resolution for each line is 1024 binned pixels and the number of pixels in the segment is 1024 binned pixels With horizontal binning enabled on a camera that has 4096 physical pixels in each line the effective resolution for each line is 2048 binned pixels and the number of pixels in each segment of a line is 1024 binned pixels And with horizontal binning enabled on a camera that has 8192 physical pixels in each line the effective resolution for each line is 4096 binned pixels and the number of pixels in each segment of a line is 1024 binned pixels When you are setting up the area of interest on a camera with only one segment in each line and you have horizontal binning enabled the Max Seg AOI Pixels is simply equal to the AOI length multiplied by 2 When you are setting up the area of interest on a camera with two or more segments in each line and you have horizontal binning enabled you first find the segment that contains the largest number of binned pixels and then you multiply the number of binned pixels in that segment by 2 Here is an example Suppose that you are using a cam
212. n 7 2 1 1 on page 168 and Section 8 4 1 on page 219 Modified the labelling of the y axis of Figure 3 in Section 1 4 on page 11 Updated the minimum high time of the ExSync signal in Section 2 7 2 on page 35 Corrected the recommendations of when to use Line A First and Line B First modes in Section 3 3 on page 43 Updated the calculations of the actual exposure time with ExSync edge controlled mode and of the max allowed programmed exposure time with ExSync programmable mode in Section 4 1 4 on page 73 Added a note about a decreased maximum line rate for the spL2048 140km when operated with 8 tap output at 80 Mhz in Section 4 3 on page 77 and Section 5 1 on page 89 Updated the calculation for the max allowed line rate according to formula 1 in Section 4 3 2 on page 84 Added Section 4 3 4 on page 86 Camera Settings for the Maximum Specified Line Rate Updated and added line valid delay data in Section 5 2 1 2 on page 97 Section 5 2 2 2 on page 106 and Section 5 2 3 2 on page 116 Removed the incorrect information that the line counter is reset whenever the stamp feature is disabled from Section 6 7 on page 146 Added note about data depth of the transmitted data when using the lookup table feature with a 10 bit or 12 bit video data output mode in Section 6 8 on page 151 Added the name FactorySet in Section 6 14 on page 159 Added note not to use the CCT in demo mode in Section 7 1 on page 166 Removed the Microcontroller
213. n a register is equal to the register base address plus the offset for the field Look at the Video Data Output Mode CSR on page 183 as an example The Mode field of this register has an address of 0x1701 the base address of 0x1700 plus the offset of 0x0001 By writing a value to this address you can set the video data output mode By reading the value at this address you can determine the current output mode setting The Video Data Output Mode CSR is a simple CSR with only two fields Most of the other feature CSRs have several read write fields that let you set the parameters associated with the feature They may also have read only fields that contain information about the minimum and maximum allowed setting for each parameter Section 7 2 2 2 on page 176 lists the feature CSRs in the camera and shows detailed information about the use of each field within the register 7 2 2 4 Raw Value Fields vs Absolute Value Fields As you look through the descriptions of the feature CSRs you will notice that some CSRs have a parameter that can be set by writing a value to a raw field or by writing a value to an absolute field You will find this to be true for the Exposure Time Line Period Gain and Offset parameters The common characteristic among these parameters is that they are scalar i e they can be set to a value within a continuous scale rather than just a small set of individually defined values Any one of these scala
214. nd the camera will begin to operate normally You can check to see if the camera has detected an overtemperature condition with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read commands from within your own application to read the camera s inquiry registers With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Overtemperature parameter in the Camera Information parameters group to determine if an overtemperature condition has been detected If the value is 1 an overtemperature condition is present By Reading Inquiry Registers You check for an overtemperature condition by reading the value of bit 20 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register see page 170 If the bit is set to 1 an overtemperature condition is present See Section 7 2 1 on page 168 for an explanation of Inquiry Registers and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Note The Overtemperature parameter in the CCT and bit 20 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register will be set to 1 when the camera detects an overtemperature condition They will remain set to 1 until the condition is corrected and a reset or a power off on is performed 156 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 11 2 Camera Power Undervoltage or Overvoltage Condition Detected The required camera power voltage for the camera is 12 VDC 10 If a camera power voltage be
215. nductor DS90CR288A or an equivalent Detailed data sheets for these components are available at the National Semiconductor web site www national com The data sheets contain all of the information that you need to implement Camera Link including application notes The camera uses a National Semiconductor DS90LV048A differential line receiver to receive the RS 644 camera control input signals and the serial communication input signal defined in the Camera Link specification A DS90LV047A differential line transmitter is used to transmit the serial communication output signal defined in the specification Detailed spec sheets for these devices are available at the National Semiconductor web site www national com Camera models with a single MDR connector see Table 5 and Figure 11 on page 26 implement the base configuration as defined in the Camera Link specification and include one differential line transmitter The transmitter in the camera is designated as Transmitter X When a camera is set for a 2 tap video data output mode it uses the base Camera Link configuration Camera models with two MDR connectors implement the medium full configuration as defined in the Camera Link specification and include three differential line transmitters The transmitters in the camera are designated as Transmitter X Transmitter Y and Transmitter Z If a camera is set for a 4 tap video data output mode it uses the medium Camera Link configuration and employ
216. ne acquisition and readout are considered in this section For more information about delays see Section 4 1 4 on page 73 Section 5 2 on page 92 and Section 6 3 on page 125 Valid for the spL2048 70kc and for the spL4096 70kc only If the enhanced raw line acquisition mode is selected in ExSync operation the maximum line rate for these camera models is 137 kHz When the camera is operating with an ExSync signal three modes of exposure time control are available edge controlled mode level controlled mode and programmable mode In ExSync edge controlled mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the ExSyc signal The pixels are exposed and charge is accumulated over the full period of the ExSync Basler sprint Mono Cameras 69 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 70 signal rising edge to rising edge The falling edge of the ExSync signal is irrelevant The pixel values read out of the sensor on the rising edge of ExSync see Figure 26 ExSync Period Exposure ExSync Signal Line Readout Fig 26 ExSync Edge Controlled Mode In ExSync level controlled mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the ExSyc signal The exposure time is determined by the time between the falling edge of ExSync and the next rising edge The pixels are exposed and charge is accumulated only when ExSync is low The pixel values are read out of the sensor on the rising edge of the ExSync si
217. ne acquisition mode and other times operate the camera in one of the other modes you should first set the camera for single line acquisition mode and follow the steps below You should then set the camera for any one of the other acquisition modes and you should go through the steps a second time The camera s user shading values file has one area where it holds the PRNU values it uses for single line mode and another area where it stores the values for all of the other modes To generate a set of user PRNU values 1 Place a uniform white or light colored target in the field of view of the camera Adjust your light ing optics line rate exposure mode exposure time gain and camera temperature as you would for normal system operation 2 Set the camera for the desired line acquisition mode 3 Make sure the area of interest parameters are set so that the camera will use the full length of the sensor see Section 6 2 on page 122 It is possible to generate shading values when the AOI is set to a smaller value than the full length of the sensor In this case only the shading values inside the AOI will be calculated but the full shading file will be written Values that are outside of the current AOI will be copied from the previously activated shading file 4 Perform several acquisitions and examine the pixel values returned from the camera The pixel values for the brightest pixels should be about 80 to 85 of maximum a If the pi
218. ng parameters may also need to be configured Gain Offset Area of interest Stamp Shading correction The camera is programmable via the RS 644 serial connection that is integrated into the Camera Link interface between the frame grabber and the camera Two methods can be used to change the camera s parameters The first and easier approach is to change the parameters using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT The CCT is especially useful during initial camera testing and the camera design in process See Section 7 1 on page 166 for more information about the configuration tool You can also change the parameters directly from within your application software by using binary read write commands to set values in the camera s registers see Section 7 2 on page 167 Note The number of features parameters depends on the camera version Cameras with a lower or higher ID number may have fewer features or have more features than described in this manual Features on cameras with a lower or a higher ID number may not operate exactly as described in this manual Basler sprint Mono Cameras 165 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 1 Configuring the Camera with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT The Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT is a Windows based program used to easily change the camera s parameter settings The CCT is especially useful during initial camera testing and the camera design in process The C
219. nk transmitters as defined in the Camera Link standard The data valid bit included in the video data output from the camera indicates that valid data is being transmitted Pixel data is only valid when this bit is high For more detailed information about the data valid bit see Section 5 on page 89 2 8 3 Pixel Data Bits Pixel data bits are transmitted via output ports on the X Y and Z Camera Link transmitters The ports as defined in the Camera Link standard are shown in Figure 13 on page 34 The assignment of pixel data bits to output ports varies depending on the video data output mode of the camera The available video data output modes and the bit assignments are explained in detail in Section 5 on page 89 The bit assignments comply with the Camera Link standard The tables also show the assignments for the line valid bit the data valid bit and the pixel clock These assignments are constant for all output modes 36 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Physical Interface 2 8 4 Camera Link Pixel Clock As shown in Figure 13 on page 34 the Camera Link clock signal is assigned to the strobe port TxClkIn pin on the X Y and Z Camera Link transmitters as defined in the Camera Link standard The Camera Link clock is used to time the transmission of acquired pixel data The Camera Link clock speed can be set to either 80 MHz or to 40 MHz The default is 40 MHz Setting the Camera Link Clock Speed You can set the clock sp
220. ns mounted on the camera Whenever you remove the cap to mount a lens be sure that the lens mount is pointing down The 8k cameras are shipped with protective self adhesive foils covering the lens mounts To avoid collecting dust on the camera s sensor make sure that the foil is always in place when there is no lens mounted on the camera Whenever you remove the foil to mount a lens be sure that the lens mount is pointing down Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Warranty Precautions To ensure that your warranty remains in force Do not remove the camera s serial number label If the label is removed and the serial number can t be read from the camera s registers the warranty is void Do not open the camera housing Do not open the housing Touching internal components may damage them Keep foreign matter outside of the camera Be careful not to allow liquid flammable or metallic material inside of the camera housing If operated with any foreign matter inside the camera may fail or cause a fire Electromagnetic fields Do not operate the camera in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields Avoid electrostatic charging Transportation Transport the camera in its original packaging only Do not discard the packaging Cleaning Avoid cleaning the surface of the camera s sensor if possible If you must clean it use a soft lint free cloth dampened
221. nt value of the Mode field of the Test Image Mode control and status register see page 191 When you issue a read command to the camera the camera responds by sending the requested data back to the host computer You can write data to a register field by sending a write command to the camera For example you can use a write command to change the value of the Mode field of the Test Image control register When you issue a write command to the camera the value in the register field will be replaced and the camera will send a write response back to the host computer Each field within a control register or an inquiry register has a specific memory address When you issue a binary read or a binary write command the address for the field you want to work with is included as part of the command Section 7 3 1 on page 207 describes the binary read write command format in detail Sample code that illustrates how to use binary read and write commands is available from Basler see Section 7 4 on page 214 Binary read write commands are issued to the camera via the RS 644 serial connection in the Camera Link interface between the frame grabber and the camera A standard application programmer s interface API for asynchronous serial reading and writing via the RS 644 port on the frame grabber has been defined in the Camera Link standard Appendix B API Functions All Camera Link compatible frame grabbers provide a software library dll file named clser
222. ntrol and Status Register Details 204 Configuration Set CSR sssssseseeeeeeneemen nennen 204 Shading Values GSR eese 205 7 3 Using Binary Read Write Commands a s sasaaa anaana 206 7 3 1 The Binary Read Write Command Protocol s aa aeaaaee aaea 207 7 3 1 1 Error Checking and Responses 0 e eee eee 210 7 3 2 Basic Read Write Command Explanations 0 00 0 eae 211 73 24 Read Command ger eee neat ae xU 211 1812 2 Write Commande oer pe eis ee Baa Bees Gy Ses 212 7 3 2 3 Calculating the Block Check Character 213 7 4 Binary Command Sample Code 0 eee 214 8 Troubleshooting and Support 2 000 eee eee eee eee 215 8 1 Tech Support Resources 0 tte 215 8 2 Obtaining an RMA Number 0 0 cee n 215 8 3 Fault Finding Using the Camera LED 0 0 e eee eee 216 8 4 Troubleshooting Charts 0 0 2 cece ee n 218 8 44 NO Images cen neces esacte see eed age eee TX OM TS week ee 219 8 4 2 Poor Quality Image 0 0 eens 221 8 4 3 nterfacing esee eR a Pe aie B Re ee oe ee E 222 8 4 4 RS 644 Serial Communication llle 223 8 4 5 Before Calling Basler Technical Support 0 0 0c eee eee 224 Revision HISIOEV cisely ei i are cs S iL Le eter Dogs CD MALAE 227 Ide oe ictu desc ee ds er es Rc a each ei eR E EE 233 Basler sprint Mono Cameras V Table o
223. ntrolled Exposure 3 28 us 3 41 us 3 98 us 4 11 us Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 33 us 3 46 us 4 03 us 4 16 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 38 us 3 51 us 4 38 us 4 51 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 33 us 3 46 us 4 03 us 4 16 us Single Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 09 us 3 20 us 10 22 us 10 32 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 14 us 3 25 us 10 57 us 10 67 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 09 us 3 20 us 10 22 us 10 32 us Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 12 us 3 22 us 10 24 us 10 35 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 17 us 3 27 us 10 59 us 10 70 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 12 us 3 22 us 10 24 us 10 35 us Table 15 Line Valid Delay with the 8k Camera Set for a 2 Tap Video Data Output Mode Basler sprint Mono Cameras 99 Video Data Output Modes AWO00016213000 5 2 2 4 Tap Output Modes 4 Tap 12 Bit Output Mode In 4 tap 12 bit mode on each pixel clock cycle the camera transmits data for four pixels at 12 bit depth a line valid bit and a data valid bit In the 4 tap output modes
224. o developed a binary read write command protocol that can be used to change camera modes and parameters via the serial connection from within your own application software using the API delivered with the frame grabber See Section 7 3 on page 206 for details on the binary read write command protocol 2 9 4 Making the Serial Connection Frame grabbers compliant with the Camera Link specification are equipped with a serial port integrated into the Camera Link interface that can be used for RS 644 serial communication The characteristics of the serial port can vary from manufacturer to manufacturer If you are using the Basler Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT to configure the camera the tool will detect the characteristics of the serial port on the frame grabber and will determine the appropriate settings so that the tool can open and use the port Note In order for the CCT to detect and use the port the characteristics of the port must comply with the Camera Link standard and the clser dll called for in the standard must be present When the camera is powered on or when a camera reset is performed your PC may receive one random character on the serial interface We recommend clearing the serial input buffers in your PC after a camera power on or reset If you are configuring the camera using binary commands from within your application software your software must be able to access the frame grabber serial port and to determine the
225. ocation for 8k Cameras The location of the lines on the sensor chip is as shown in the drawing below Camera Link medium full go o Camera Link base i J L 2 Sensor lines S b it e S Line B pixel 1 gt reference plane Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale Line A pixel 1 Fig 10 Sensor Line Location 8k Cameras Basler sprint Mono Cameras Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 1 6 Environmental Requirements 1 6 1 Temperature and Humidity Housing temperature during operation 0 C 50 C 432 F 122 F Humidity during operation 20 80 relative non condensing Storage temperature 20 C 80 C 4 F 176 F Storage humidity 5 95 relative non condensing 1 6 2 Heat Dissipation You must provide sufficient heat dissipation to maintain the temperature of the camera housing at 50 C or less Since each installation is unique Basler does not supply a strictly required technique for proper heat dissipation Instead we provide the following general guidelines In allcases you should monitor the temperature of the camera hous
226. of 32 for cam eras that have 2048 or 4096 pixels and in increments of 64 for cameras that have 8192 pixels The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt Number of Pixels in Each Sensor Line 1 For example if you are working with a camera that has 2048 pixels in each sensor line The AO Starting Pixel can be set to 1 33 65 97 etc The AOI Length can be set to 256 288 320 352 etc The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt 2049 If you are working with a camera that has 4096 pixels in each sensor line The AO Starting Pixel can be set to 1 33 65 97 etc The AOI Length can be set to 256 288 320 352 etc The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt 4097 If you are working with a camera that has 8192 pixels in each sensor line The AO Starting Pixel can be set to 1 65 129 193 etc The AOI Length can be set to 256 320 384 448 etc 122 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features The AOI Starting Pixel AOI Length lt 8193 When the area of interest feature is used the maximum allowed line rate may increase For more information about the impact of the AOI settings on the maximum allowed line rate see Section 4 3 on page 77 Using the AOI Feature with Horizontal Binning Enabled If the camera s horizontal binning feature see Section 3 8 on page 61 is enabled it will have an effect on the way that you set up the area of interest With horizontal binning enabled pairs of adjacent pixel in a line are binned togeth
227. ommand you can read the data in a field and get information about the camera The address for any field within a register is equal to the register base address plus the offset for the field For example the Vendor Information Inquiry Register see below has a Vendor Name field with an address of 0x0101 the base address of 0x0100 plus an offset of 0x0001 By reading the data at address 0x0101 you can get information about the camera vendor s name The section starting below lists the inquiry registers in the camera and shows detailed information about the use of each field within the registers 7 2 1 1 Inquiry Register Details Vendor Information Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0100 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Vendor Name Offset 0x0001 Size 20 Bytes Type Read only Description String containing the camera vendor s name The string is zero terminated if less than 20 bytes are needed and unterminated if all 20 bytes are needed Model Information Inquiry Register Base Address 0x0200 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available
228. on volatile memory Files in the non volatile memory are not lost when the camera is reset or switched off There are four files in the camera s non volatile memory available for holding a saved configuration set A configuration set saved in one of these files is commonly referred to as a user configuration set or user set for short The four files available for holding a saved user configuration set are called UserSet01 UserSet02 UserSet03 and UserSet04 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 159 Features AW00016213000 Note For the 8k camera only two user sets UserSet01 and UserSet02 are available Note The configuration sets described in this section only include parameter settings and the values stored in the lookup table see Section 6 8 on page 151 Configuration sets do not include the values used for shading correction Values for shading correction are stored in a different file For more information about shading correction and shading correction values see Section 6 4 on page 128 160 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 14 1 Saving the Work Set to a User Set File As mentioned above the work configuration set is stored in the camera s volatile memory and the parameter settings in the work set are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The camera can save the current work set values in the volatile memory to files in the camera s non volatile memory Files in the non volatile
229. ono Cameras 145 Features AW00016213000 6 7 Line Stamp The line stamp feature provides you with information about each acquired line such as the line counter value the sum of the pixel values in the line and the contrast value of the line When the line stamp feature is enabled 16 extra stamp pixel values are added to the end of each transmitted line as shown in Figure 49 As an example the figure illustrates stamp pixels when a camera with 4096 pixels per line is set for a 2 tap video data output mode and edge or level controlled exposure Each stamp pixel carries an 8 10 or 12 bit value that conveys information about the transmitted line Eo EE i uu m d TD Signal BOUNCE Aya aM NOM EU ee eee Line Valid Data Valid Pixel Clock DO Pixel lt X X X 1X 3X 5X 4091K4093KX4095K s KX S3 Xs X XSI3XS5X X X X X X 2 Data D1 EJ ee QO Qu Quee X9 X8 C D Actual Pixel Values 16 Added Stamp Pixel Values Fig 49 Stamp Pixels with 2 Tap Video Data Output and Edge or Level Controlled Exposure Note When the camera is operating in an 8 bit output mode the stamp pixels will be 8 bit values When the camera is operating in a 10 bit output mode the stamp pixels will be 10 bit values but only the 8 MSBs will carry information The 2 LSBs will be packed with zeros When the camera is operating in a 12 bit output mode the stamp pixels will be 12 bit values but only the 8 MSBs will carry information The
230. orrection values and do not use DSNU correction during generation 0x03 Generate PRNU correction values and use DSNU correction during generation See Section 6 4 on page 128 for more information about the shading correction feature Gamma CSR Register Base Address 0x4300 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Gamma Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the gamma correction value For example if the value in this field is set to 1 5259 the gamma correction value will be 1 5259 The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 5 on page 140 for more information about gamma correction Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute gamma setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute gamma setting
231. osure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 4 3 3 Increasing the Maximum Allowed Line Rate You may find that you would like to acquire lines at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with your current camera settings If this is the case you must first use the four formulas described on page 79 to determine which factor is restricting the maximum line rate the most Next you must try to make that factor less restrictive If you find that formula one exposure time is the most restrictive factor you should decrease the exposure time Decreasing the exposure time will increase the maximum line rate yielded by formula one If you decrease the exposure time you may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by using a brighter light source or by increasing the opening of your lens aperture If you find that formula two sensor readout is the most restrictive factor you may be able to adjust your AOI settings to decrease the Max Seg AOI Pixels Using a smaller AOI can decrease the Max Seg AOI Pixels Decreasing the Max Seg AOI Pixels will increase the maximum line rate yielded by formula two Centering the AOI on the sensor may increase the maximum line rate yielded by formula two If you are using a camera that has two or more sensor segments and the AOI is positioned so that many pixels in the AOI fall into one sensor segment and few pixels fall into a neighboring segment you can try repositioning your AOI The Max Seg AOI Pixels wil
232. ou would normally expect However the data in these lines is not useful to you and should be ignored 134 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features Note If you started the generation of the shading values using the CCT you are using an ExSync signal to trigger acquisitions and you are operating the camera at a line period greater than approximately 300 ms you should be aware of a potential problem Under these conditions the CCT may time out while it is waiting for the camera to complete 128 acquisitions and you may see a Camera is not responding error message This error is not fatal to the shading value creation process If you close the error message window wait several seconds and then click the Refresh button on the CCT the shading values will be properly created using binary commands you are using an ExSync signal to trigger acquisitions and you are operating the camera at very low line rates you should be aware of a restriction The camera will not acknowledge or respond to binary commands while it is performing the 128 acquisitions needed to create a set of shading values Once you have issued the binary command to start generating shading values you should wait until the generation process is complete before you issue any further binary commands The time needed to complete the generation process will be equal to 128 times the line period 9 Once 128 acquisitions have been completed the camera cal
233. own in Figure 29 The line period is determined by the setting for the line period parameter Line Period m Exposure Internal Control Signal Line Readout Fig 29 Free Run Edge Controlled Mode 74 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control In free run programmable mode line acquisition begins on the rising edge of the ExSyc signal The pixels are exposed and charge is accumulated when the internal control signal is low The pixel values are read out of the sensor on the rising edge of the internal control signal as shown in Figure 30 In this mode the line period is determined by the setting for the line period parameter The ex posure time parameter setting determines how long the control signal will be low and thus de termines the exposure time Line Period Internal Control Signal Exposure Time Line Readout Fig 30 Free Run Programmable Mode 4 2 2 Selecting a Free Run Exposure Mode Setting the Line Period and Setting the Exposure Time You can select a free run exposure time control mode set the line period and set the exposure time for the free run programmable mode with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Exposure Time Control Mode
234. page 72 OOA c 172 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Binary Command Protocol Status Inquiry The camera has been programmed to detect several errors in the format of any binary commands received by the camera When an error condition is detected a flag is set The binary command status inquiry register allows you to read the error flags Register Base Address 0x0C30 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name Binary Command Status Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Each bit in this field specifies an error condition see table below Bit O is the least significant bit If a bitis set to 1 the error condition assigned to that bit is present If the bit is set to 0 the error is not present Bit Description 0 A binary command with no BFS was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 1 A byte timeout has occurred see Section 7 3 1 1 on page 210 2 A binary command with an invalid OpCode was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 3 A binary command with no BFE was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 4 A binary command with an incorrect BCC was received see Section 7 3 1 on page 207 5 A binary command with an address error was received see
235. parameter settings for achieving the maximum line rates in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added information about the set screws for attaching lens mounts in Figure 4 on page 13 and Figure 8 on page 17 Corrected the minimum high time for the ExSync signal in level controlled mode in Section 4 1 4 on page 73 Changed the jitter related to exposure times to 100 ns in Section 4 1 4 on page 73 Modified the explanation related to using a too long exposure time for ExSync programmable mode in Section 4 1 4 on page 73 Added advice for increasing the line rate in Section 4 3 3 on page 86 Indicated on page 170 that a black image results if a parameter error has occurred Corrected the minimum gain value in the example in Section 7 2 2 1 on page 174 Added the parameter error to Section 8 4 2 on page 221 AW00016209000 29 Sep 2009 Updated the telephone number for the European technical support on the contact page Corrected the default setting for cameras with settable clock speed in Section 2 8 4 on page 37 Corrected MHz to kHz in the notes relating to the spL2048 140km in Section 4 3 on page 77 and Section 5 1 on page 89 Added a note about how to reach the max line rate when e g max taps and clock speed dual line acuisition mode or horizontal binning are used in Section 4 3 on page 77 Added a note about how to reach the max line rate when horizontal binning is used in Section 3 8 on page 61 Removed all information
236. planation of Inquiry Registers and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 for an explanation of using read write commands Note The Voltage Error parameter in the CCT and bit 6 in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status Inquiry Register will be setto 1 when the camera detects a camera power undervoltage or overvoltage condition They will remain set to 1 until the condition is corrected i e the camera power voltage is returned to its normal range Applying a camera power voltage greater than 25 VDC may seriously damage the camera See Section 6 10 on page 155 for more information Basler sprint Mono Cameras 157 Features AW00016213000 6 12 Camera Status Checks During operation the camera performs a continuous series of self checks You can view the current camera status in several ways by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus see Section 7 1 on page 166 Check the Camera Status parameter in the Camera Information parameters group to see if any error codes are present by using binary read write commands from within your own application to read the value in the Camera Status field of the Camera Status inquiry register see page 170 Section 7 2 1 on page 168 explains inquiry registers and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands by checking the LED on the back of the camera If certain error conditions are present the LED will flash see Section 8 3 on page 216 6 13 Camera Reset You can initiate a cam
237. print Mono Cameras 121 Features AW00016213000 6 2 Area of Interest The area of interest feature lets you specify a portion of the sensor lines During operation only the pixel information from the specified portion of the lines is read out of the sensor and transmitted from the camera to the frame grabber The size of the area of interest is defined by declaring a starting pixel and a length in pixels For example if you specify the starting pixel as 33 and the length in pixels as 256 the camera will readout and transmit pixel values for pixels 33 through 288 as shown in Figure 41 Starting Line B Pixel FEEBISISEI ppp 7 a0 a pprspepespespeapaspeqperpespesporpe pres Fre pre pers Er spar os as o s s ss sess oops eso ao a 42 a arrazaz it gt 1 Line A Length in Pixels _ pixels within the AO Fig 41 Area of Interest If you are operating the camera in single line acquisition mode the AOI applies to line A In all other line acquisition modes the AOI applies to both line A and line B For more information about line acquisition modes see Section 3 on page 41 When setting the AOI the following guidelines apply if horizontal binning is not enabled The AO Starting Pixel can be set to 1 and can be increased in increments of 32 for cameras that have 2048 or 4096 pixels and in increments of 64 for cameras that have 8192 pixels The AOI Length must be a minimum of 256 pixels can be increased in increments
238. quired as adapters For more information about the optical components and how to obtain them see Section 1 3 2 1 on page 7 and Section 1 3 2 2 on page 9 Note When a C mount lens is used with a 2k camera the image produced by the pixels near the ends of the sensor lines may appear degraded This effect is caused by using a lens with a relatively small diameter compared to the length of the sensor lines Typically use of a C mount lens on 2k cameras is appropriate in applications where the image data from pixels near the ends of each line can be discarded 1 3 2 Lens Adapters for the 8k Camera Basler sprint 8k cameras feature specific V Basler interfaces which allow connecting to Basler specific adapters Two Basler specific adapters are available UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount a Basler specific modification of UNIFOC 100 95 of Schneider Kreuznach M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount a Basler specific conical tube The choice of a Basler specific adapter further optical components and lens depends e g on the magnification and the working distance required by your application Contact Basler technical support for selecting the Basler specific adapter further optical components and the lens that will best suit your requirements For information about obtaining the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount or the M58 x 0 75 V Basler lens mount contact Basler technical support For information about additional optical componen
239. r Line Averaging Acquisition Mode You can enable the line averaging acquisition mode by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs Note that to enable line averaging you must set a combination of two camera parameters First you must set the Line Acquisition Mode parameter to Averaging Second you must set the Line Delay parameter to None This combination of settings results in line averaging With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 use the Line Acquisition Mode parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to set the line acquisition mode to Line Averaging By Setting CSRs To enable the line averaging acquisition mode write the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Line Acquisition Mode CSR see page 177 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Mono Cameras 59 Line Acquisition Modes AW00016213000 3 Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Mode The operation of the camera s time delayed line averaging feature is essentially the same as the time delayed line summing feature with one exception after the pixel values have been summed each sum is divided by 2 and rounded up if necessary For more information about time delayed line summing see Section 3 5 on page 53 Setting the Camera
240. r condition is detected the LED will begin to flash The number of flashes indicate the detected error as shown in Table 30 If several error states are present the LED outputs the error code that has the highest priority To get more information about the camera s current condition you can check the camera status as described in Section 6 12 on page 158 slow orange flashes Load another parameter set LED Description Priority LED is not lit Power to the camera is not present or the input voltage is too low see Section Section 2 5 on page 32 and Section 6 10 on page 155 LED is solid green for This is the normal LED sequence at power on or after a camera reset several seconds flashes orange and then becomes solid orange Solid orange The camera has power and is OK LED flashes with Indicates that the camera is busy performing a normal operation such gradually increasing as generating shading tables When the operation is complete the frequency flashing stops Continuous red flashing An undervoltage or overvoltage condition related to the externally 1 supplied camera power has been detected see Section 6 10 on highest page 155 Solid red An internal overvoltage condition has been detected 2 Check whether camera power is supplied with the correct voltage of 12 VDC If the LED is solid red despite correct camera power you must return the camera for repair To do so follow the RMA proc
241. r parameters can be set on a raw scale or on an absolute scale A raw scale is simply a range of integer values that has no defined units An absolute scale is a range of floating point values that has defined units Consider the Gain parameter as an example Setting the Raw Gain If you set the gain by writing a value to the Raw Gain field of the Gain CSR you can write any integer value from 2731 to 16383 decimal Writing an integer value to the raw register sets the gain but it doesn t directly tell you how many dB of gain you will be getting from the camera at that setting To determine the dB of gain you are getting at a particular raw gain setting you must use the formula ettin Gain in dB 20 x log4q Sm 174 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Setting the Absolute Gain If you set the gain by writing a value to the Absolute Gain field of the Gain CSR you can write a floating point value from 3 5 to 12 04 decimal in increments of 0 01 Writing a floating point value to the absolute register sets the gain directly in dB For example if the absolute gain field is set to 3 42 then the camera would be set for 3 42 dB of gain Note You do not need to set both the raw field and the absolute field Setting just one of the fields is sufficient and you can choose to set whichever field best suits your needs Basler sprint Mono Cameras 175 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 2
242. rameters that you were using when the problem occurred To make a copy of the parameters start the CCT select the File menu and click Dump Current Settings to File Send the generated file to Basler technical support If you cannot access the camera please try to state the following parameter settings Video data output mode Exposure time control mode Exposure time Gain Offset Frame rate 13 Live image test image If you are having an image problem try to generate and save live images that show the problem Also generate and save test images Please save the images in BMP format zip them and send them to Basler technical support 226 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Revision History Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00016201000 5 Dec 2006 Draft version for review only AW00016202000 1 Feb 2007 Preliminary version Applies to prototypes only AW00016203000 11 Jul 2007 First release covering production cameras AW00016204000 25 Oct 2007 Updated the camera version ID number stated in Section 1 1 on page 1 Updated the specification tables in Section 1 2 on page 2 Updated the warranty precautions on page 23 Added information about the switchable Camera Link clock speed to Section 2 8 4 on page 37 Added information about a new dual line acquisition mode to Section 3 1 on page 41 and Section 3 3 on page 43 Updated the
243. ras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Shading Values CSR See Section 7 2 3 2 on page 200 for information about using the shading values bulk data control registers Register Base Address 0x2A00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Control Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field selects a bulk data control function 0x00 Enumerate 0x01 ENext 0x02 Read 0x03 Write 0x04 Erase 0x05 Activate 0x06 Copy Field Name Info Offset 0x0002 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description If you are performing a bulk read or write operation this field will indicate when no more data exists 0x00 More data exists 0x01 No more data exists 0x02 File operation error 0x04 This is an activated file Field Name File Name Offset 0x0003 Size 20 Bytes Type Read Write Description Character string indicating the name of the bulk data file The field contains 20 characters left aligned and zero padded Only the following names are allowed FactoryShading UserShading Field Name Size Offset 0x0017 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description If the fi
244. re typical Drawings are not to scale y E 3 vo F E E o FF E i o 8 g 5 E g F S a L Fig 4 Mechanical Dimensions in mm 2k and 4k Cameras Basler sprint Mono Cameras 13 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 1 5 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for 2k and 4k Cameras The sensor positioning accuracy is as shown in the drawings below Center of sensor X axis 3129 Camera Link medium full el VAL G eWi O Camera Link base L J 0 08 Photosensitive surface of the CMOS sensor pe reference plane Tolerances are typical Drawings are not to scale Fig 5 Sensor Positioning Accuracy in mm unless otherwise noted 2k and 4k Cameras Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 3 Sensor Line Location for 2k and 4k Cameras The location of the lines on the sensor chip is as shown in the drawing below SE Camera Link medium full oO efc 3J e et Je 9 Camera Link base l J Sensor lines Line B pixel 1 Line A pixel 1
245. rface of the conveyor should be in parallel planes This condition should be met to ensure that all of the pixels in the sensor lines view the object at the same magnification If the camera is positioned so that the sensor is rotated on its short axis you will see haloing in the transport direction And if the camera is positioned so that the sensor is rotated on its long axis you will see haloing that is perpendicular to the transport direction If your system design will not allow you to achieve sensor to conveyor parallelism a telecentric lens setup can be used to overcome the problems that this will cause A telecentric setup usually requires high illumination 64 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 9 3 System Design Calculations Our recommended approach for calculating system design criteria is tuned to matching the line of view of the sensor to the width of your conveyor The example below illustrates this approach Example Assume the following conditions Conveyor width 850 mm Conveyor movement per encoder step 0 09 mm Center to center distance between sensor lines 10 um Each line in the sprint s sensor is 10 um wide and they are adjacent to one another Therefore the center to center distance is 10 um Pixel size 10 um Length of sensor line 40 96 mm 4096 pixels line x 10 um pixel With an objective lens in place the direction of travel of the object will cause the image to
246. rint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes End of e Programmed 4 Time M Line Valid Delay see Table 18 Table 19 and Table 20 df Line Valid 4 Data Valid Pixel Clock Pixel Data X X X X1X5X9 X 13K t7 X 24 X 25 X N Z7XN 23 X N 19 X N 15 XN 11 X N 7 X N 3 12 10 B 8 bits i3 ata XX KEK EK IKK Xn XX esae Qe eX X X XO or 8 bits Pixel Data X X X X3X7TXTUX15 X 19 X 23 X 27X N 25X N 20X N 17 X N 13X N 9 X N 5 X N 1 12 10 d 8 bits Pixel Data X X X MW 4X BX 12 X 16 X 20 X 24 X 28 X N 24 X N 20X N 16X N 12X N 8 X N 4 X N 12 10 8 bits Timing diagrams are not to scale N At full resolution without horizontal binning enabled N 8192 on the 8k model 4096 on 4k models and 2048 on 2k models N At full resolution with horizontal binning enabled N 4096 on the 8k model 2048 on 4k models and 1024 on 2k models If the AOI feature is used N will be determined by the AOI settings Fig 37 Four Tap Modes with Programmable Exposure Basler sprint Mono Cameras 105 Video Data Output Modes AW00016213000 5 2 2 2 Line Valid Delays for 4 Tap Output Modes The table below shows the line valid delay see Figure 36 on page 104 and Figure 37 on page 105 when the camera is set for full resolution and a 4 tap video data output mode Note that the delay depends on the line acquisition mode setting the Camera Link clock spee
247. rogrammable 9 40 us 9 51 us 13 15 us 13 26 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 40 us 9 51 us 13 15 us 13 26 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 40 us 9 51 us 13 15 us 13 26 us Table 18 Line Valid Delay with the 2k Camera Set for a 4 Tap Video Data Output Mode 106 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 4k Cameras Video Data Output Modes Line Valid Delays for 4 Tap Modes 4k Cameras Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 22 us 3 34 us 10 24 us 10 36 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 27 us 3 39 us 10 59 us 10 71 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 22 us 3 34 us 10 24 us 10 36 us Dual Line Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 20 us 3 34 us 10 22 us 10 37 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 20 us 3 34 us 10 22 us 10 37 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 20 us 3 34 us 10 22 us 10 37 us Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 44 us 9 54 us 13 27 us 13 36 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 79 us 9 89 us 13 62 us 13 71 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 44 us 9 54 us 13 27 us 13 36 us Dual Line Acquisi
248. rom the support section of www baslerweb com fill it out and fax the pages to your local dealer or to your nearest Basler support center Or you can write an e mail listing the requested pieces of information and with the requested files attached Our technical support contact numbers are shown in the title pages of this manual 224 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Troubleshooting and Support 1 The camera s product ID The camera s serial number The operating system A WO N Frame grabber that you use with the camera 5 CCT version that you use with the camera 6 Describe the problem in as much detail as possible If you need more space use an extra sheet of paper 7 l fknown whats the cause of the problem 8 When did the problem occur After start While running After a certain action e g a change of parameters 9 How often did does the problem fr Once fr Every time occur Regularly when Occasionally when Basler sprint Mono Cameras 225 Troubleshooting and Support AW00016213000 10 How severe is the problem Camera can still be used Camera can be used after take this action Camera can no longer be used 11 Did your application ever run r Yes r No without problems 12 Parameter set It is very important for Basler technical support to get a copy of the exact camera pa
249. rotection up to 25 VDC If the camera power voltage is between 14 and 18 VDC a camera power voltage error will be detected see Section 6 11 2 on page 157 The LED on the back of the camera will begin to flash red If a camera power voltage between 18 and 25 VDC is applied to the camera the camera s internal power regulator will automatically disconnect and the camera will no longer operate When the camera power voltage is returned to the normal range the camera will return to normal operation Applying a camera power voltage greater than 25 VDC can seriously damage the camera Basler sprint Mono Cameras 155 Features AW00016213000 6 11 Error Condition Detection 6 11 1 Imaging Sensor Overtemperature Condition Detected As described in Section 6 9 on page 154 the camera includes a temperature sensor that is used to monitor the temperature of the imaging sensor The camera also has imaging sensor overtemperature protection If the temperature of the camera s imaging sensor rises above 75 C an overtemperature condition will be detected and the circuitry for the imaging sensor will switch off In this situation you will still be able to communicate with the camera and the camera will still be able to transmit test images however no live images can be generated The imaging sensor circuitry will remain off until its temperature falls below 60 C Once the sensor temperature falls below 60 C the error condition will clear a
250. s transmitters X and Y If a camera is set for an 8 tap video data output mode it uses the full Camera Link configuration and employs transmitters X Y and Z Note Cameras that implement the medium full configuration can also be used as base configuration cameras To do so simply set the camera for a 2 tap video data output mode In this situation only one Camera Link cable is required The cable should be connected to MDR connector 1 on the camera and to the base connector on your frame grabber Table 6 on page 27 and Table 7 on page 28 show the pin assignments for the MDR connectors The schematic in Figure 13 on page 34 shows the full configuration Camera Link implementation for the camera and a typical implementation for a full configuration frame grabber For more information about how the pixel data captured by the camera is assigned to the camera s transmitter s see Section 5 on page 89 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 33 AW 00016213000 Physi ysical Interface
251. s Bulk Data CSR 7 2 3 1 Using the Configuration Set Bulk Data CSR Saving the Work Configuration Set to a User Set File As described in Section 6 14 on page 159 the work configuration set resides in the camera s volatile memory Assume that you want to save the parameter values in the current work set to the UserSet01 file in the camera s non volatile memory To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserSet07 to the Name field of the configu ration set bulk data CSR see page 204 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field of the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x06 Setting the value to 0x06 initiates a copy function 198 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera This procedure will copy the current work set settings from the camera s volatile memory into a file called UserSet01 in the non volatile memory Note that any existing data in the file will be overwritten Sample code that illustrates how to save a bulk data file is available from Basler seeSection 7 4 on page 214 Note There are four files available in the non volatile memory to hold saved user configuration sets UserSet01 UserSet02 UserSet03 or UserSet04 You must use one of these file names when you save a user configuration set Activating a User Set File or the Factory Set File The process of activating a user set file or the factory set fi
252. s CSRs and Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 62 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes 3 9 Recommendations for Using Time Delayed Line Summing or Time Delayed Line Averaging 3 9 1 Camera Operating Recommendations To achieve the best results when using time delayed line summing or time delayed line averaging certain operating requirements should be met Exposure start should be triggered by an ExSync signal see Section 4 on page 69 Use of the programmable exposure mode is recommended to ensure uniform exposure The edge controlled or level controlled exposure modes can be used but only if the conveyor speed is 100 stable If the conveyor speed is not stable unacceptable variations in exposure time will result 3 9 2 System Design Recommendations When you are using time delayed line summing or No Halos time delayed line averaging for a given point on the object to be captured correctly its image must fall precisely on line A in the sensor and then precisely on line B in the sensor If delayed line summing or Pb el averaging is being done correctly the captured images will be sharp and clear as shown in the right side of Figure 25 If there are variations in the positioning of the image when it is captured by line A and by line B the captured images will include gray halos as shown in the left side of Figure 25 A list of system design requirements is given b
253. s Inquiry Register see page 173 This bit is auto cleared on read Reserved An FPGA not ready error has occurred For more information about the error read the FPGA Status Inquiry register see page 172 This bit clears when you read the FPGA Status Inquiry register A trigger error has occurred Either the maximum allowed line rate has been exceeded or the ExSync signal is missing For more information about the error read the FPGA Status Inquiry register see page 172 This bit clears when you read the FPGA Status inquiry register Reserved The last shading value generation process failed The DSNU shading value generation process can fail if the pixel values in the lines captured during the generation process are too high This process should be performed in darkness or in very low light conditions The PRNU shading value generation process can fail if the values for the darkest pixels in the captured lines are less than 1 2 of the values for the highest pixels This problem is often caused by extremely non uniform lighting or by poor quality optics This bit will clear when you perform a successful shading value generation process An overtemperature condition is present see Section 6 11 1 on page 156 Low line rate compensation activity 1 active O inactive see Section 4 1 3 on page 72 An internal overvoltage condition is present see Section 8 3 on page 216 Reserved Basler sprint Mono Cameras 171 Configuring
254. s camera power overvoltage protection as described in Section 6 10 on page 155 32 CAUTION CAUTION Applying Incorrect Camera Power Can Damage the Camera The nominal voltage for the camera power is 12 VDC 10 We do not recommend applying a voltage less than 10 8 VDC or greater than 13 2 VDC The camera has camera power undervoltage protection that is triggered if the voltage drops below 10 5 VDC It also has camera power overvoltage protection up to 25 VDC See Section 6 10 on page 155 for more detailed information camera power power voltage greater than 25 VDC can seriously damage the camera Making or Breaking Connections Incorrectly Can Damage the Camera Be sure that all power to your camera and to your host PC is switched off before you make or break connections to the camera Making or breaking connections when power is on can result in damage to the camera or to the frame grabber If you can t switch off the power be sure that the camera power plug is the last connector that you plug into the camera when making connections and the first connector that you unplug from the camera when breaking connections Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Physical Interface 2 6 Camera Link Implementation The camera uses National Semiconductor DS90CR287 devices as Camera Link transmitters For the Camera Link receivers on your frame grabber we recommend that you use the National Semiconductor DS90CR288 the National Semico
255. significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted 92 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes 2 Tap 8 Bit Output Mode Operation in 2 tap 8 bit mode is similar to 2 tap 12 bit mode In 8 bit mode however the four least significant bits output from the camera s ADCs are dropped and only the 8 most significant bits of data per pixel are transmitted Note The video data output mode that you select may affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate See Section 4 3 on page 77 The data sequence outlined below along with Figure 34 on page 95 and Figure 35 on page 96 describes what is happening at the inputs to the Camera Link transmitters in the camera 5 2 1 1 Video Data Sequence for 2 Tap Output Modes When the camera is not transmitting valid data the line valid and data valid bits sent on each cycle of the pixel clock will be low Once the camera has completed an exposure there will be a delay while data is read out of the sensor When readout is complete the camera will begin to transmit pixel data On the clock cycle where valid pixel data transmission begins the line valid and data valid bits both become high Two data streams DO and D1 are transmitted in parallel during this clock cycle On this clock cycle data stream DO will transmit data for pixel 1 in the line Data stream D1 will transmit data for pixel 2 Depending on the video data output mode selected the pixel data will be at 12 b
256. sprint Mono Cameras Features 5T 6dB 0 dB 192 Camera Output 428 in an 8 bit mode 6 dB 64 0 Low Medium High Light Level Fig 40 Various Levels of Gain dB of Gain 3 5 0 3 5 6 0 12 0 119 Features AW00016213000 If you know the integer setting for the gain you can calculate the resulting dB of gain that the camera will achieve by using the following formula Sainn aB con P Setting the Gain You can set the gain with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Gain parameter in the Gain amp Offset parameters group to set the gain By Setting CSRs You set the gain by writing a value in dB to the Absolute Gain field or by writing an integer value to the Raw Gain field of the Gain CSR see page 183 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explains CSRs and the difference between using the absolute field and the raw field in a CSR Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands 6 1 2 Offset Offset is adjustable on an integer scale that ranges from 4095 to 4095 The default setting is 0 If the camera is set for an 8 bit video data output mode increasing the integer offset setting by 16 will increase the digital pixel values output from the camera by 1 decreasing the integer offset setting
257. ss 0x4111 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Lookup Table Value Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field enters a value into the camera s lookup table at the index currently specified by the lookup table index CSR See Section 6 8 on page 151 for more information about the lookup table feature Field Name Min Offset 0x0002 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for a lookup table value Field Name Max Offset 0x0003 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for a lookup table value Field Name Increment Offset 0x0004 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description An integer value indicating the increment for the lookup table value Camera Reset CSR Register Base Address 0x0B00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is
258. ster is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Control Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field selects a bulk data control function 0x00 Enumerate 0x01 ENext 0x02 Read 0x03 Write 0x04 Erase 0x05 Activate 0x06 Copy Field Name Info Offset 0x0002 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description If you are performing a bulk read or write operation this field will indicate when no more data exists 0x00 More data exists 0x01 No more data exists 0x02 File operation error 0x04 This is an activated file Field Name File Name Offset 0x0003 Size 20 Bytes Type Read Write Description Character string indicating the name of the bulk data file The field contains 20 characters left aligned and zero padded Only the following names are allowed FactorySet UserSet01 UserSet02 UserSet03 and UserSet04 UserSet03 and UserSet04 are not allowed for the 8k camera Field Name Description Size Offset 0x0017 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only If the file name refers to an already existing bulk data file this field will contain the file size in bytes Otherwise the field contains zeros Field Name Description Data Offset 0x001B Size Variable Type Read Write Byte sized register that is used to sequentially write to or read from a bulk data file 204 Basler sprint Mono Came
259. strated in Figure 15 through Figure 18 This example describes dual line acquisition line A first when an ExSync signal and the programmable exposure control mode are used The example looks at four contiguous points on an object moving past the camera Each point represents the area on the 44 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Line Acquisition Modes object that will be captured by one line in the sensor when a line acquisition is performed As you look at the figures notice that on the ExSync cycles where an acquisition is performed line A will capture one point on the object and line B will capture a different point on the object Also notice that on these cycles the pixel data for line A will be transmitted while the pixel data for line B will be buffered On the ExSync cycles where acquisition is not performed the buffered pixel data for line B will be transmitted Basler sprint Mono Cameras 45 Line Acquisition Modes ExSync Cycle 1 Pixel data for point 1 from line A is transmitted from the camera IIT Pixel data for Drawing not to scale point 2 from line B is stored in a buffer Image of point 1 acquired by line A Image of point 2 acquired by line B
260. t 6 Port A7 TxIN5 RxOut5 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 DO Bit 7 MSB Port BO TxIN7 RxOut7 DO Bit 8 DO Bit 8 D1 Bit 0 Port B1 TxIN8 RxOut8 DO Bit 9 DO Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 1 Port B2 TxIN9 RxOut9 DO Bit 10 Not used D1 Bit 2 Port B3 TxIN12 RxOut12 DO Bit 11 MSB Not used D1 Bit 3 Port B4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D1 Bit 8 D1 Bit 8 D1 Bit 4 Port B5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D1 Bit 9 D1 Bit 9 MSB D1 Bit 5 Port B6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D1 Bit 10 Not used D1 Bit 6 Port B7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D1 Bit 11 MSB Not used D1 Bit 7 MSB Port CO TxIN15 RxOut15 D1 Bit O D1 Bit O D2 Bit 0 Port C1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D1 Bit 1 D1 Bit 1 D2 Bit 1 Port C2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D1 Bit 2 D1 Bit 2 D2 Bit 2 Port C3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D1 Bit 3 D1 Bit 3 D2 Bit 3 Port C4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D1 Bit 4 D1 Bit 4 D2 Bit 4 Port C5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D1 Bit5 D1 Bit5 D2 Bit 5 Port C6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D1 Bit 6 D1 Bit 6 D2 Bit 6 Port C7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D1 Bit 7 D1 Bit 7 D2 Bit 7 MSBO LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid Line Valid Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used Not Used Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Data Valid Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Not Used Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutClk Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Pixel Clock Table 16 Bit Assignments for 4 Tap Output Modes MDR Conn 1 Transmitter X 102 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Video Data Output Modes MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y
261. t Modes 111 Video Data Output Modes MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y Port Camera Frame Bit Assignment Grabber 8 Tap 8 Bit Port DO TxINO RxOutO D3 Bit 0 Port D1 TxIN1 RxOut1 D3 Bit 1 Port D2 TxIN2 RxOut2 D3 Bit 2 Port D3 TxIN3 RxOut3 D3 Bit 3 Port D4 TxIN4 RxOut4 D3 Bit 4 Port D5 TxING RxOut6 D3 Bit 5 Port D6 TxIN27 RxOut27 D3 Bit 6 Port D7 TxIN5 RxOut5 D3 Bit 7 MSB Port EO TxIN7 RxOut7 D4 Bit 0 Port E1 TxIN8 RxOut8 D4 Bit 1 Port E2 TxIN9 RxOut9 D4 Bit 2 Port E3 TxIN12 RxOut12 D4 Bit 3 Port E4 TxIN13 RxOut13 D4 Bit 4 Port E5 TxIN14 RxOut14 D4 Bit 5 Port E6 TxIN10 RxOut10 D4 Bit 6 Port E7 TxIN11 RxOut11 D4 Bit 7 MSB Port FO TxIN15 RxOut15 D5 Bit 0 Port F1 TxIN18 RxOut18 D5 Bit 1 Port F2 TxIN19 RxOut19 D5 Bit 2 Port F3 TxIN20 RxOut20 D5 Bit 3 Port F4 TxIN21 RxOut21 D5 Bit 4 Port F5 TxIN22 RxOut22 D5 Bit 5 Port F6 TxIN16 RxOut16 D5 Bit 6 Port F7 TxIN17 RxOut17 D5 Bit 7 MSB LVAL TxIN24 RxOut24 Line Valid FVAL TxIN25 RxOut25 Not Used DVAL TxIN26 RxOut26 Data Valid Spare TxIN23 RxOut23 Not Used Strobe TxINCLK RxOutCIk Pixel Clock Table 22 Bit Assignments for 8 Tap Output Mode MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Y 112 AW00016213000 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 MDR Conn 2 Transmitter Z Port Camer
262. t and Exposure Time Control 4 1 4 Guidelines When Using an ExSync Signal When using an ExSync signal to control exposure several general guidelines must be followed The ExSync signal must toggle In order for the camera to detect a transition from low to high the ExSync signal must be held high for at least 1 3 us when the camera is set for the level controlled exposure mode and for at least 100 ns when the camera is set for programmable or edge controlled exposure mode The ExSync signal must be held low for at least 2 0 us In ExSync edge controlled mode The actual exposure time line period 1 8 us 100 ns In the ExSync programmable mode if exposure avaraging is not used The maximum allowed programmed exposure time line period 1 3 us 100 ns If you set the exposure time to be longer than this allowed maximum the camera will use the set exposure time and will ignore the new ExSync signal s while exposure proceeds The line rate will accordingly be decreased Exposure Start Delay In the ExSync edge controlled and ExSync programmable exposure modes there is a slight delay between the rise of the ExSync signal and the actual start of exposure In the ExSync level controlled mode there is a slight delay between the fall of the ExSync signal and the actual start of exposure This delay is commonly referred to as an exposure start delay The exposure start delay for each mode is as shown in the table below
263. teger value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Absolute Gain Offset 0x0001 Size 4 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing a floating point value to this field sets the gain in dB The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number See Section 6 1 on page 119 for more information about gain Field Name Absolute Min Offset 0x0005 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Absolute Max Offset 0x0009 Size 4 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed floating point value for the absolute gain setting The value in this field is a standard IEEE 754 single precision 32 bit floating point number Field Name Raw Gain Offset 0x000D Size 2 Bytes Type Read Write Description Writing an integer value to this field sets the gain The dB of gain that the camera will achieve at a given setting is determined by the formula shown in Section 6 1 on page 119 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 High byte of the raw value Field Name Raw Min Offs
264. the Camera AW00016213000 FPGA Status Inquiry The camera has been programmed to detect several error conditions in its field programmable gate array FPGA When an error condition is detected a flag is set The FPGA status inquiry register allows you to read the error flags Register Base Address 0x0C10 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this inquiry register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available Field Name FPGA Status Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description Each bit in this field except bit 7 specifies an error condition see table below Bit 0 is the least significant bit If a bit is set to 1 the error condition assigned to that bit is present If the bit is set to 0 the error is not present Bit Description 0 No FPGA firmware available 1 FPGA firmware is available but the firmware has failed to load 2 The camera s maximum line rate has been exceeded Note If you are operating the camera in ExSync programmable mode and you trigger the camera faster than allowed the camera will automatically ignore any trigger signals that would cause a max line rate exceeded condition and this bit will not be Set There is no ExSync signal Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 7 Low line rate compensation activity 1 active O inactive see Section 4 1 3 on
265. the camera is set for an 8 bit video data output mode increasing the integer value by 16 will increase the digital values output from the camera by 1 and decreasing the integer value by 16 will decrease the digital values output from the camera by 1 If the camera is set for a 10 bit video data output mode increasing the integer value by 4 will increase the digital values output from the camera by 1 and decreasing the integer value by 4 will decrease the digital values output from the camera by 1 If the camera is set for a 12 bit video data output mode increasing the integer value by 1 will increase the digital values output from the camera by 1 and decreasing the integer value by 1 will decrease the digital values output from the camera by 1 The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the raw value Byte 2 High byte of the raw value Field Name Raw Min Offset 0x000F Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Minimum allowed integer value for the raw gain setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the min value Byte 2 High byte of the min value Field Name Raw Max Offset 0x0011 Size 2 Bytes Type Read only Description Maximum allowed integer value for the raw gain setting The bytes in this field are interpreted as follows Byte 1 Low byte of the max value Byte 2 High byte of the max value Basler sprint Mono Cameras 185 Configuring the Camera AW0
266. the horizontal binning feature together with the camera s vertical binning acquisition mode the effective pixel size will become 20 um H x 20 um V In this situation you will get a response that is approximately four times higher than normal and you will have a square pixel size For more information about the vertical binning acquisition mode see Section 3 4 on page 51 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 61 Line Acquisition Modes AWO00016213000 Note Due to operations within the camera the maximum specified line rate may possibly not be reached when using horizontal binning with maximum tap and Camera Link clock speed settings You will nonetheless be able to reach the maximum specified line rate by using fewer taps and or decreasing the Camera Link clock speed For more information about reaching the maximum specified line rate see Section 4 3 on page 77 Enabling Horizontal Binning You can enable horizontal binning with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the Horizontal Binning parameter in the Output Mode parameters group to enable horizontal binning By Setting CSRs You enable horizontal binning by writing the appropriate value to the Mode field of the Horizontal Binning CSR see page 178 Section 7 2 2 on page 174 explain
267. things happen The values from the activated file are immediately copied into the camera s volatile memory When you have shading correction enabled the camera uses the shading values in the volatile memory to perform shading correction A link is created between the activated file and the volatile memory The shading values from the activated file will automatically be copied into the volatile memory whenever the camera is powered up or reset Assume for example that the user shading values file is the activated file In this case when the camera is powered on or reset the values from the user shading values file will be copied into the volatile memory of the camera and will be used to perform shading correction Activating a Shading Values File You can activate a shading values file with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s bulk data control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the File Name Select parameter to select a shading values file and the Activate button in the Shading Files parameters group to activate the selected file By Setting CSRs You can activate a shading values file by writing values to the shading values bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains bulk data CSRs and using the bulk data activate process Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read
268. this in mind here is how the check digit for the write command shown in Section 7 3 2 2 on page 212 would be calculated 0000 0100 the binary representation of 0x04 FTF 0000 0001 the binary representation of 0x01 DataLen 0000 0101 XOR sum 0000 0101 Previous XOR Sum 0000 0001 the binary representation of 0x01 Address Byte 1 0000 01 00 New XOR sum 0000 0100 Previous XOR sum 0001 1000 the binary representation of 0x18 Address Byte 2 0001 1100 2 New XOR sum 0001 11002 Previous XOR Sum 0000 0001 the binary representation of 0x01 Data 0001 11012 Final XOR sum 0001 1101 0x1D the block check character Basler sprint Mono Cameras 213 Configuring the Camera AW00016213000 7 4 Binary Command Sample Code Sample code that illustrates how to use binary commands with sprint cameras is available at the Basler web site Please look for the Binary Protocol II programming sample at http www baslerweb com 214 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Troubleshooting and Support 8 Troubleshooting and Support This section outlines the resources available to you if you need help working with your camera It also provides some basic troubleshooting information that you can use to solve problems 8 1 Tech Support Resources The troubleshooting resources in this section of the manual will help you to find the cause of many common problems If you need more assistance you can contact the Basler technical support te
269. ti on Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 43 us 9 54 us 13 26 us 13 36 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 43 us 9 54 us 13 26 us 13 36 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 43 us 9 54 us 13 26 us 13 36 us Table 19 Line Valid Delay with the 4k Camera Set for a 4 Tap Video Data Output Mode Basler sprint Mono Cameras 107 Video Data Output Modes 8k Camera AW00016213000 Line Valid Delays for 4 Tap Modes 8k Camera Single Line Acquisition Mode 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 28 us 3 41 us 10 38 us 10 51 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 33 us 3 46 us 10 73 us 10 86 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 28 us 3 41 us 10 38 us 10 51 us Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 33 us 3 46 us 10 43 us 10 56 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 38 us 3 51 us 10 78 us 10 91 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 33 us 3 46 us 10 43 us 10 56 us Single Line Acquisition Mode 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 9 51 us 9 61 us 13 41 us 13 51 us Edge Controlled Exposure 9 86 us 9 96 us 13 76 us 13 86 us Level Controlled Exposure 9 51
270. time control modes edge controlled 69 74 level controlled 70 programmable 70 75 ExSyne signal sich 35 69 F firmware version inquiry register 170 four tap video data output modes 100 FPGA status inquiry register 172 free TU uii tnnt 74 G galli aee dee aere dates 119 gain control and status register 183 gamma control and status register 189 gamma correction sesessss 140 H heat dissipation sssesssss 20 helical mount UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler 6 7 UNIFOC 76 iiie peniteat tein 9 horizontal DINNING ecce 61 control and status register 178 housing size 2k cameras sss 2 4k cameras oderit ttes 3 4 Sk cameras usted eee 5 aee 20 I imaging sensor temperature inquiry register 173 input signals 234 AW00016213000 EXSYING Tiai gast 35 serial to camera sssse 35 inquiry registers 167 168 L fs Mec IT UR 216 lens adapter re 9 2k cameras sss 2 Ak cameras eeseeeeee 3 4 Sk Camera S eode 5 lens adapter 2k 4k cameras 16 lens mount M58 x 0 75 V Basler 6 9 level controlled exposure time control mode 70 line acquisition mode control and st
271. timized set of parameters is created when the camera is manufactured The factory set is saved in a permanent file in the camera s non volatile memory As explained on page 161 you can also save up to four different user configuration sets to files in the camera s non volatile memory Assuming that you have saved one or more user set files you can choose to make one of the saved user set files or the factory set file the activated file When you activate a file two things happen The values from the activated file are immediately copied into the work set in the camera s volatile memory The camera will now actively use the configuration values that were copied into the work set A link is created between the activated file and the camera s volatile memory The values in the activated file will automatically be copied into the work set whenever the camera is powered up or reset Assume for example that the UserSet01 file is the activated file In this case when the camera is powered on or reset the values from the UserSet01 file will be copied into the volatile memory of the camera and will be the actively used parameter settings You can activate a saved user set file or the factory set file by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s bulk data control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section
272. tion 5 2 3 on page 109 In general you can operate the camera at a higher maximum line rate when you use an output mode with more taps This is true because the modes with more taps output a greater amount of pixel data on each cycle of the pixel clock and therefore require less time to output a given amount of data For more information about how the video data output mode will affect the camera s maximum allowed line rate see Section 4 3 on page 77 The Camera Link pixel clock speed can be set to either 40 or 80 MHz see also Table 11 For more information about setting the Camera Link pixel clock speed see Section 2 8 4 on page 37 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 89 Video Data Output Modes AW00016213000 For Models Video Data Outmode Modes Camera Link Clock Speeds pL2048 70km 2 tap 8 bit 2tap 10 bit 2 tap 12 bit 40 MHz or 80 MHz SpL2048 140km 2tap 8 bit 2tap 10 bit 2tap 12 bit 4 tap 8 bit 4tap 10 bit 4tap 12 bit 8 tap 8 bit 40 MHz or 80 MHz spL4096 39km 2 tap 8 bit 2tap 10 bit 2tap 12 bit 4 tap 8 bit 4tap 10 bit 4tap 12 bit 40 MHz or 80 MHz spL4096 70km spL4096 140km spL8192 70km 2 tap 8 bit 2tap 10bit 2 tap 12 bit 4 tap 8 bit 4tap 10 bit 4 tap 12 bit 8 tap 8 bit 40 MHz or 80 MHz Table 11 Available Video Data Output Modes and Pixel Clock Speeds n 8 tap video data output mode at 80 MHz Ca
273. ts and how to obtain them visit e g the Schneider Kreuznach website www schneiderkreuznach com 6 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions The following sections illustrate how the Basler sprint 8k cameras connect to Basler specific adapters and further optical components As examples components by Schneider Kreuznach are considered 1 3 2 1 Adapting with the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler Helical Mount The following example illustrates the use of the UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount connected to a Makro Symmar HM 5 6 120 0058 lens by Schneider Kreuznach The UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount includes a sliding insert that allows adjusting the extension over a range of ca 100 mm The assembly shown in Figure 1 as an example is adjusted for a magnification of 1 1 The overall length of the adjusted assembly including the camera with connectors is ca 306 7 mm Taking account of the working distance of the Makro Symmar HM 5 6 120 0058 lens of ca 212 mm the overall distance between the imaged object and the camera s back with connectors is ca 518 7 mm Makro Symmar HM 5 6 120 0058 lens UNIFOC 100 95 V Basler helical mount Camera Photosensitive surface of the CMOS sensor Locking Locking V mount Screw
274. ues with the Camera Configuration Tool Basler sprint Mono Cameras 131 Features AW00016213000 Plus see Section 7 1 on page 166 With the CCT set the value of the Generate parameter in the DSNU amp PRNU Shading Correction parameters group to Generate DSNU Values b You can also start the generation of a set of DSNU values by using a binary write command see Section 7 3 on page 206 to write a value to the Generate field of the Shading Value Generate CSR see page 189 6 The camera must make at least 64 acquisitions to create a set of DSNU shading correction values If your camera is set to control exposure with an ExSync signal you must generate at least 64 ExSync signal cycles after you signal the camera to begin generating the values If you are running the camera in a free run exposure time control mode you must wait long enough for the camera to complete at least 64 acquisitions a When the camera is acquiring the lines it needs to create the DSNU shading values the line valid and data valid signals will go high and low as you would normally expect However the data in these lines is not useful to you and should be ignored D Note If you started the generation of the shading values using the CCT you are using an ExSync signal to trigger acquisitions and you are operating the camera at a line period greater than approximately 300 ms you should be aware of a potential problem Under these conditions the CCT m
275. uration set files that currently contains saved parameters To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR see page 204 to 0x00 Setting the value to 0x00 initiates an enumerate function 2 Use a binary read command to read the Name field of the configuration set bulk data CSR This is the name of a configuration set file that contains saved data 3 Usea binary read command to read the value in the Info field of the configuration set bulk data CSR a If the value is 0x00 it means that the file contains saved parameters and it is not an activated file Continue to step 4 b If the value is 0x04 it means that the file contains saved parameters and it is an activated file Continue to step 4 c If the value is 0x01 no more configuration set files with saved parameters exist Exit the procedure 4 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x01 Setting the value to 0x01 initiates an enumerate next function 5 Return to step 2 This procedure would list all of the configuration set bulk data files that contain a saved parameter set If you wanted to enumerate the existing saved shading value file you would use a similar procedure but you would write to and read from the shading value bulk data CSR instead Sample code that illustrates how to enumerate bulk data
276. uration set or the set of shading values in named files within the camera s non volatile memory The camera s bulk data control and status registers CSRs are used to save blocks of bulk data to files in the non volatile memory For example you can use the configuration set bulk data control register to store the settings from the current work configuration set in a named file For sprint cameras there are two types of bulk data configuration sets and shading values There is a separate bulk data control and status register for each type of bulk data The configuration set bulk data CSR is used to work with configuration sets the shading value CSR is used to work with shading values By writing to fields within a bulk data CSR you can do things such as saving a block of bulk data to a file in the non volatile memory copying a saved bulk data file from the camera to a PC and creating a list of existing saved bulk data files Section 7 2 3 4 on page 204 lists the bulk data CSRs and provides a general description of the use of each field within the registers The best way to understand the use of the bulk data CSRs is to read about the different tasks that you can perform with them Section 7 2 3 1 on page 198 describes the tasks and procedures that are normally performed by manipulating the Configuration Set Bulk Data CSR Section 7 2 3 2 on page 200 describes the tasks and procedures that are normally performed by manipulating the Shading Value
277. ut the exposure averaging feature see Section 6 3 on page 125 Formula 2 calculates the maximum line rate based on the sensor readout time 160000000 x n Max Lines Sa i955 Seq AOI Pixels 224 Where n 2 if the camera is set for the Dual Line Max 140 kHz line acquisition mode see Section 3 on page 41 n 1 for all other line acquisition modes Max Seg AO Pixels is the number of AOI pixels in the segment that contains the most AOI pixels see the explanation of Max Seg AOI Pixels on page 81 for more details Formula 3 calculates the maximum line rate based on the amount of time it takes the camera to process the pixels read out from the sensor PPR Li cu Mar Lines ra enh T Where PPR is the pixel processing rate for your camera model as stated in the table below Model PPR Model PPR spL2048 70km 160000000 spL4096 39km 160000000 spL2048 140km 320000000 spL4096 70km 320000000 spL4096 140km 640000000 Model PPR spL8192 70km 640000000 AO Length is the length of the AOI based on the current AOI length setting see Section 6 2 on page 122 p 0 if the line stamp feature is not enabled see Section 6 7 on page 146 p 16 when the line stamp feature is enabled Basler sprint Mono Cameras 79 Exposure Start and Exposure Time Control AW00016213000 Formula 4 calculates the maximum line rate based on the amount of time it takes to transmit the pixel data for an acquired line
278. via a serial link Requirements Connectors One 6 pin Hirose micro miniature receptacle Two 26 pin female MDR connectors Power 12 VDC 10 Max 7 0 W 12 VDC when set for the single line acquisition mode Max 10 0 W 12 VDC when set for all other line acquisition modes Lens Adapter F mount M42 Housing Size 48 0 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm without lens adapter or connectors Lx WxH 84 9 mm x 87 0 mm x 62 0 mm with F mount adapter and connectors Weight 360 g without lens adapter Table 3 General Specifications for 4k Cameras Continued For information about the combinations of parameter settings for achieving the maximum specified line rates see Table 10 on page 87 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 2 3 Camera Model with 8k Pixels Specification spL8192 70km Sensor Size 2 lines 8192 pixels per line Sensor Type Monochrome linear CMOS Pixel Size 10 um x 10 um Camera Link 40 MHz or 80 MHz switchable Clock Speed Maximum 70 kHz Line Rate Data Output Type Camera Link medium full configuration Data Output Modes 2 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 4 tap 8 10 or 12 bit 8tap 8 bit Synchronization Via external trigger signal or free run Exposure Control Edge controlled level controlled or programmable Gain and Offset Programmable via a serial link Requirements Conne
279. with a small quantity of high quality window cleaner Because electrostatic discharge can damage the sensor you must use a cloth that will not generate static during cleaning cotton is a good choice To clean the surface of the camera housing use a soft dry cloth To remove severe stains use a soft cloth dampened with a small quantity of neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the housing they can damage the surface finish Read the manual Read the manual carefully before using the camera Basler sprint Mono Cameras 23 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00016213000 24 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Physical Interface 2 Physical Interface This section describes the camera s physical interface It includes details about connections input signals and output signals It also includes a description of how the Camera Link standard is implemented in the camera CAUTION CAUTION Applying Incorrect Input Power Can Damage the Camera The camera s nominal input power voltage is 12 VDC 10 We do not recommend applying an input voltage less than 10 8 VDC or greater than 13 2 VDC The camera has undervoltage protection that is triggered if the input voltage drops below 10 5 VDC It also has input overvoltage protection up to 25 VDC See Section 6 10 on page 155 for more detailed information about input undervoltage and overvoltage protection Applying an
280. write commands 136 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Features 6 4 7 Copying the Factory Shading Values into the User Shading Values File As explained in Section 6 4 on page 128 the camera contains a set of factory determined shading correction values in a file in its non volatile memory As explained in Section 6 4 5 on page 131 you can also generate a set of user shading values and save them to a separate file in the non volatile memory In some situations it may be advantageous for you to be able to simply copy the contents of the factory shading values files into the file for user shading values You can copy the values from the factory file into the user file with the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary read write commands from within your own application to set the camera s bulk data control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 you use the File Name Select parameter and the Copy button in the Shading Files parameters group to copy the data in the factory shading values file to the user shading values file By Setting CSRs You can copy the data in the factory shading values file to the user shading values file by writing values to the shading values bulk data CSR Section 7 2 3 on page 198 explains bulk data CSRs and using the bulk data copy process Section 7 3 1 on page 207 explains using read write commands Basler sprint Mono Cameras 137
281. x Min Max Programmable 3 16 us 3 31 us 3 71 us 3 86 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 16 us 3 31 us 3 71 us 3 86 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 16 us 3 31 us 3 71 us 3 86 us Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 00 us 3 10 us 9 97 us 10 08 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 05 us 3 15 us 10 32 us 10 42 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 00 us 3 10 us 9 97 us 10 08 us Dual Line Acquisiti on Modes 80 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 2 98 us 3 10 us 9 96 us 10 07 us Edge Controlled Exposure 2 98 us 3 10 us 9 96 us 10 07 us Level Controlled Exposure 2 98 us 3 10 us 9 96 us 10 07 us Table 13 Line Valid Delay with the 2k Camera Set for a 2 Tap Video Data Output Mode Basler sprint Mono Cameras 97 Video Data Output Modes 4k Cameras AW00016213000 Line Valid Delays for 2 Tap Modes 4k Cameras Single Line Time Delayed Line Summing and Time Delayed Line Averaging Acquisition Modes 40 MHz Without Horizontal Binning With Horizontal Binning Min Max Min Max Programmable 3 23 us 3 37 us 3 83 us 3 97 us Edge Controlled Exposure 3 28 us 3 42 us 4 18 us 4 32 us Level Controlled Exposure 3 23 us 3 37 us 3 83 us 3 97 us Dual Line
282. x value Byte 3 High byte of the max value Byte 4 Always 0x00 not used 190 Basler sprint Mono Cameras AW00016213000 Configuring the Camera Test Image Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x1800 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Writing an integer to this field sets the test image mode 0x00 Test images disabled 0x01 Test image 1 enabled fixed gray gradient 0x02 Test image 2 enabled moving gray gradient 0x03 Test image 3 enabled uniform black 0x04 Test image 4 enabled uniform gray See Section 6 6 on page 142 for more information about the test image feature Line Stamp Mode CSR Register Base Address 0x2B00 Field Name Register Status Offset 0x0000 Size 1 Byte Type Read only Description The integer value in this field indicates the status of this control and status register 0x00 The register is not available 0x01 The register is available and all related settings are OK 0x80 A value in the register is set out of range Field Name Mode Offset 0x0001 Size 1 Byte Type Read Write Description Wr
283. xel values for the brightest pixels are at 80 to 85 of maximum go on to step 3 b If the pixel values for the brightest pixels are not at 80 to 85 of maximum adjust your lighting and or lens aperture setting to achieve 80 to 85 5 Perform several acquisitions and examine the pixel values in each line In each line the values for the darkest pixels must be at least 67 of the values for the lightest pixels in the line If the values for the darkest pixels are less than 67 of the value for the lightest pixels the camera will not be able to fully correct for shading variations a If the values for the darkest pixels are at least 67 of the value for the lightest pixels go on to step 4 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 133 Features AW00016213000 b If the values for the darkest pixels are less than 67 of the value for the lightest pixels it usually indicates extreme variations in lighting or poor quality optics Make corrections as required 6 Begin acquiring lines either by generating an ExSync signal to trigger line capture or by setting the camera for a free run exposure time control mode Note When you generate the PRNU values in the step below you will have two options 1 You can generate the PRNU values without using DSNU shading correction If you do this the pixel values used to calculate the PRNU correction values will not be corrected for DSNU 2 You can generate the PRNU values with using DSNU shading correction
284. you now want to upload this file from your host PC to a camera To do so you would follow this procedure 1 Use a binary write command to write the file name UserSet02 to the Name field of the configu ration set bulk data CSR 2 Use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x03 Setting the value to 0x03 places the camera in write mode 3 Use a binary command to do a bulk data write to the camera The binary write command must have the following characteristics OpCode 0x04 This OpCode makes the command a bulk data write DataLen the number of bytes to be written Max is 255 characters Address 0x281B Base address for the configuration set bulk data CSR plus the offset for the Data field Data Bytes to be written Repeat step 3 as many times as needed to write all of the data from the PC to the camera 5 Close the bulk data file in the camera To close the file use a binary write command to set the value of the Control field in the configuration set bulk data CSR to 0x02 Setting the value to 0x02 places the camera in read mode and closes the file Upto 255 characters can be written with a single binary bulk data write command If the file is larger than 255 characters repeated binary bulk data write commands are required When repeated bulk data write commands are required the file is written sequentially with each write command starting where the previous wr
285. you want to get an increased response from the camera Using vertical binning will result in approximately double the response of single line acquisition Figure 19 illustrates vertical binning Line B 4 t tt Pixels Summed and Transmitted as es ii i a Single Value Fig 19 Vertical Binning The physical pixels in each line of the sensor are 10 um H x 10 um V So when you use vertical binning you get the same effect as using a single line sensor that has 10 um H x 20 um V pixels Some users may find the effective 10 um x 20 um pixel size to be objectionable because the effective pixel is no longer square Note that if you use the vertical binning acquisition mode together with the camera s horizontal binning feature the effective pixel size will become 20 um H x 20 um V In this situation you will get a response that is approximately four times higher than normal and you will have a square pixel size For more information about the horizontal binning feature see Section 3 8 on page 61 Basler sprint Mono Cameras 51 Line Acquisition Modes AWO00016213000 Setting the Camera for Vertical Binning You can set the camera for vertical binning acquisition mode by using the Camera Configuration Tool Plus CCT or by using binary write commands from within your own application to set the camera s control and status registers CSRs With the CCT With the CCT see Section 7 1 on page 166 use the Lin

Sprint User's Manual.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents